Canon Eos 750D Instruction Manual

DS126571 to the manual 5a1f6e8a-f891-49c2-96b8-1324183cd8f4

EOS 750D - Instruction Manual eos-rebelt6i-750d-im-en Free User Guide for Canon EOS Series Camera, Manual - page2

2015-08-11

: Canon Canon-Eos-750D-Instruction-Manual-783678 canon-eos-750d-instruction-manual-783678 canon pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 414

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

EOS REBEL T6i (W)
EOS 750D (W)

E
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

Introduction
The EOS REBEL T6i or EOS 750D is a digital single-lens reflex camera
featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 24.2 effective
megapixels, DIGIC 6, high-precision and high-speed 19-point AF
(cross-type AF point: max. 19 points), approx. 5.0 fps continuous
shooting, Live View shooting, Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie
shooting, and Wi-Fi/NFC function.

Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.20-22) and “Handling Precautions” (p.23-25).

Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera.

Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.

Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

Camera
(with eyecup and body cap)

Battery Pack
LP-E17
(with protective cover)

Battery Charger
LC-E17/LC-E17E*

Interface Cable

* Battery Charger LC-E17 or LC-E17E is provided. (The LC-E17E comes with a
power cord.)
 The Instruction Manuals and CD-ROMs provided are listed on the next page.
 If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
 Depending on the Lens Kit type, lens instruction manuals may also be
included.
 Be careful not to lose any of the above items.

Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs
The instruction manual consists of a booklet and electronic manuals
(PDF files on the CD-ROM). The booklet is the Basic Instruction
Manual. For more detailed instructions, see the Camera Instruction
Manual on the CD-ROM.

Camera and Wi-Fi/NFC Function
Basic Instruction Manual

Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM
Contains the following manuals (PDF files):
• Camera Instruction Manual
• Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual
• Quick Reference Guide
Instructions for viewing the Camera Instruction Manual
CD-ROM are on pages 400-401.
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (Software CD-ROM)
Contains software such as image-editing software and
Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
For more information and installation procedures of the
software, see pages 404-405.
Instructions for viewing the Software Instruction Manual
are on page 406.

Compatible Cards
The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity: If the
card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera (p.59).
• SD memory cards
• SDHC memory cards*
• SDXC memory cards*
* UHS-I cards supported.

Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD
Speed Class 6 “
” or higher.
 If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
 If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need
an even faster card.
 To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s Web site.

In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.

Quick Start Guide
Insert the battery (p.36).

To charge the battery, see page 34.

Insert the card (p.37).

With the card’s label facing
toward the back of the
camera, insert it into the
card slot.

Attach the lens (p.45).
Align the lens’s white or red mount
index with the camera’s mount
index of the same color.

Set the lens focus mode switch
to (p.45).

Set the power switch to <1>,
then set the Mode Dial to
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.66).
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.

Quick Start Guide

Flip out the LCD monitor (p.39).

Focus on the subject (p.50).

Take the picture (p.50).

Review the picture.

When the LCD monitor displays the
date/time/zone setting screens, see
page 42.

Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised.

Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.

The captured image will be
displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
To display the image again, press
the button (p.97).

 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.191).
 To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.97).
 To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.304).

Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>

: Indicates the Main Dial.

: Indicates the cross keys on the top,
bottom, left, and right.

: Indicates the Setting button.

: Indicates that each function remains active
for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. after
you let go of the button.

* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.

: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
button to change its settings.

: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that the
function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.30).

: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.

Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> (p.40).
It is assumed that all the menu settings, Custom Functions, etc. are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

Chapters
Introduction

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Getting Started

Basic Shooting and Image Playback

Setting the AF and Drive Modes

Advanced Operations

Flash Photography

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)

Shooting Movies

Post-Processing Images

Printing Images

Customizing the Camera

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer

Contents at a Glance
Shooting
 Shoot automatically

 p.65-96 (Basic Zone modes)

 Shoot continuously

 p.112 (i Continuous shooting)

 Take a picture of yourself in a group  p.114 (j Self-timer)
 Freeze the action
 Blur the action

 p.150 (s Shutter-priority AE)

 Blur the background
 p.72 (C Creative Auto)
 Keep the background in sharp focus  p.152 (f Aperture-priority AE)
 Adjust the image brightness (exposure) p.159 (Exposure compensation)
 Shoot in low light

 p.66, 166 (D Flash photography)
p.122 (ISO speed setting)

 Shoot without flash

 p.71 (7 Flash Off)
p.89 (b Flash off)

 Shoot fireworks at night

 p.156 (Bulb exposure)

 Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor  p.191 (A Live View shooting)
 Use Creative filters

 p.200 (Creative filters)

 Shoot movies

 p.221 (k Movie shooting)

Image Quality
 Shoot with image effects matching the subject  p.125 (Picture Style)
 Make a large-size print of the picture

 p.116 (73, 83, 1)

 Take many pictures

 p.116 (7a, 8a, b, c)

AF (Focusing)
 Change the AF area selection mode  p.104 (S AF area selection mode)
 Shoot a moving subject

 p.79, 81, 102 (AI Servo AF)

Playback
 View the images on the camera  p.97 (x Playback)
 Search for pictures quickly

 p.278 (H Index display)
p.279 (I Image browsing)

 Rate images

 p.284 (Ratings)

 Prevent important images
from accidental deletion

 p.302 (K Image protect)

 Delete unnecessary images

 p.304 (L Delete)

 Auto play back images and movies  p.294 (Slide show)
 View the photos or movies on a TV set  p.298 (Video OUT)
 Adjust the LCD monitor brightness  p.258 (LCD monitor brightness)
 Apply special effect to images

 p.312 (Creative filters)

Printing
 Print pictures easily

 p.319 (Direct printing)

Index to Features
Power
Battery
• Charging
• Installing/Removing
• Battery check
• Checking battery
information

AF
AF operation
 p.34
 p.36
 p.41
 p.348

AF area selection mode  p.104
AF point selection

Manual focusing

Household power outlet  p.349

Auto power off

Maximum burst

Cards
Installing/Removing

Release shutter without card p.256

Lens
Attaching/Detaching

Image Stabilizer

Basic Settings
Dioptric adjustment

Date/Time/Zone

Image Quality
Image-recording quality  p.116
Picture Style

White balance

Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.136
Noise reduction for long
exposures
 p.138
Noise reduction for high
ISO speeds
 p.137
Lens aberration correction p.140
Reducing flicker

Highlight tone priority

Shooting mode

Feature guide

Aspect ratio

Metering mode

Creating/Selecting a folder  p.259

Mirror lockup

File numbering

Remote control

Using the LCD Monitor

Brightness adjustment

Touch screen

Recording Images

Index to Features

Exposure Adjustment

Exposure compensation  p.159
AEB
 p.160
AE lock
 p.162

Flash
Built-in flash
External flash
Flash function settings

 p.166
 p.171
 p.173

Wireless shooting

Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
AF method

 p.191
 p.206

Continuous AF
Touch Shutter
Creative filters

 p.204
 p.214
 p.200

Image review time

Single-image display

Shooting information
display

Index display

Image browsing
(Jump display)

Magnified view

Image rotate

Movie playback

Viewing images on a TV set p.298
Protect

Movie Shooting
 p.221
 p.206

Creative filters

Movie recording size

Movie Servo AF
Sound recording
Manual exposure
Still photo shooting
Miniature Effect Movies
Video snapshot

 p.248
 p.251
 p.225
 p.230
 p.236
 p.238

Movie shooting
AF method

Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.336
My Menu

Wi-Fi/NFC function
 Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction
Manual

Contents
Introduction

Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs ................................................... 4
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Contents at a Glance...................................................................... 10
Index to Features ........................................................................... 12
Contents ......................................................................................... 14
Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 20
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 23
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 26

Getting Started

Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 34
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 36
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 37
Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 39
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 40
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 42
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 44
Attaching and Detaching a Lens..................................................... 45
Lens Image Stabilizer ..................................................................... 48
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 49
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 51
3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 53
d Using the Touch Screen ............................................................. 56
Formatting the Card ....................................................................... 59
Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................ 61
lDisplaying the Grid ................................................................... 62
Displaying the Flicker Detection ..................................................... 63
Feature Guide ................................................................................ 64

Basic Shooting and Image Playback

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................66
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)..........................69
7 Disabling Flash ......................................................................... 71
C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................72
2 Shooting Portraits ...................................................................... 76
3 Shooting Landscapes ............................................................... 77
4 Shooting Close-ups....................................................................78
5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................ 79
8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................80
C Shooting Children ...................................................................... 81
P Shooting Food ............................................................................ 82
x Shooting Candlelight Portraits ...................................................83
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................84
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)............................................85
G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................ 86
Q Quick Control............................................................................. 88
Shoot by Ambience Selection .........................................................90
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type .................................................... 94
x Image Playback ........................................................................97

Setting the AF and Drive Modes

f: Changing the Autofocus Operation ........................................ 100
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ....................................... 104
AF Area Selection Modes ............................................................. 107
Subjects Difficult to Focus on........................................................ 110
MF: Manual Focus ..................................................................... 111
i Selecting the Drive Mode ........................................................ 112
j Using the Self-timer ................................................................. 114

Setting the Image-Recording Quality ............................................ 116
Changing the Image’s Aspect Ratio.............................................. 120
g: Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the Light............................ 122

A Selecting a Picture Style ...................................................... 125
A Customizing a Picture Style ................................................. 127
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 130
B: Matching the Light Source (White balance) ......................... 132
u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source......................... 134
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast (Auto Lighting Optimizer) ... 136
Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 137
Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations ......... 140
Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 144
Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color space) .................. 146

Advanced Operations

d: Program AE ............................................................................ 148
s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement (Shutter priority AE)..... 150
f: Changing the Depth of Field (Aperture priority AE) ............. 152
Depth-of-Field Preview .............................................................. 154
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 155
q Changing the Metering Mode (Metering mode)...................... 157
Setting Exposure Compensation (Exposure comp.) .................... 159
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ................................................. 160
A Locking the Exposure (AE Lock)............................................. 162
Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera Shake ..................................... 163

Flash Photography

D Using the Built-in Flash............................................................. 166
D Using an External Speedlite ..................................................... 171
Setting the Flash .......................................................................... 173
Using Wireless Flash.................................................................... 179
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting...................................................... 182
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting ................................................. 185

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 192
Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 198

U Applying Creative Filters ......................................................... 200
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 204
Using AF to Focus (AF Method) ................................................... 206
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter .............................................214
MF: Focusing Manually................................................................. 216

Shooting Movies

k Shooting Movies .....................................................................222
Autoexposure Shooting ..............................................................222
Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................225
Shooting Still Photos ..................................................................230
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................232
Setting the Movie Recording Size.................................................233
Shooting Miniature Effect Movies .................................................236
Shooting Video Snapshots............................................................ 238
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 248

Handy Features ............................................................................256
Disabling the Beeper ..................................................................256
Card Reminder ........................................................................... 256
Setting the Image Review Time .................................................257
Setting the Auto Power-off Time ................................................257
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 258
Creating and Selecting a Folder.................................................259
File Numbering Methods ............................................................ 261
Setting Copyright Information..................................................... 263
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................265
B: Checking Camera Settings .............................................. 266
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings............................ 267
LCD Monitor Off/On Setting .......................................................270
Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color...........................270

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning ................................................... 271
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................ 272
Manual Sensor Cleaning .............................................................. 274

x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 278
u/y Magnified View ................................................................... 280
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen ........................................ 281
b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 283
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 284
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 286
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 288
k Playing Back Movies .............................................................. 290
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 292
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 294
Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 298
K Protecting Images................................................................... 302
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 304
B: Shooting Information Display ............................................. 306

Post-Processing Images

U Applying Creative Filters......................................................... 312
S Resizing JPEG Images........................................................... 315
N Cropping JPEG Images .......................................................... 317

Printing Images

Preparing to Print.......................................................................... 320
w Printing ................................................................................... 322
Cropping the Image ................................................................... 327
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) ......................................... 329
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images ................................. 332
p Specifying Images for a Photobook ......................................... 333

Customizing the Camera

Setting Custom Functions............................................................. 336
Custom Function Settings............................................................. 338
C.Fn I : Exposure .....................................................................338
C.Fn II : Image .......................................................................... 339
C.Fn III : Autofocus/Drive ...........................................................340
C.Fn IV : Operation/Others......................................................... 343
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 346

Checking the Battery Information.................................................. 348
Using a Household Power Outlet.................................................. 349
Remote Control Shooting..............................................................350
H Using Eye-Fi Cards ................................................................. 352
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode...............................354
System Map .................................................................................. 360
Menu Settings ............................................................................... 362
Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................369
Error Codes...................................................................................382
Handling Precautions: STM Lenses (Kit Lenses) ......................... 383
Specifications ................................................................................384

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM........................400
Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................402
Software Overview........................................................................ 404
Installing the Software................................................................... 405
Software Instruction Manual ......................................................... 406
Index ............................................................................................. 407

Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.

Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.

 To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or solder
to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the battery
to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable ambient
temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in the
Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
 When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent
contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent a fire or an
explosion.
 If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
 If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire, electrical
shock or skin burn if you keep using it.
 Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
 Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
 Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
 Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an
accident.

Safety Precautions
 Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away.
 When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery and
disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, or corrosion.
 Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or
a fire.
 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do
not touch the internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
 Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.
Doing so may damage your vision.
 Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
 Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, store the
battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short-circuit. This is to prevent a
fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, or burn.
 Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
 To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.
Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
 Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet with
a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet may
become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
 Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter outlet.
The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing a fire, burns or injuries.
 A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
 Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap attached.
Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
 Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
 Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water or
metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent a fire and
an electrical shock.
 Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

Safety Precautions

Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical
injury or property damage may result.

 Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source.
The product may become hot and cause skin burns. Doing so may also cause battery
leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life of the
product.
 Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
 Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
 Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other
components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from
excessively loud volume.

Handling Precautions
Camera Care
 This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
 The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon
Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.
 Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
 Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
 The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
 Do not block the built-in flash, mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so
may cause a malfunction.
 Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
 Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
misoperation.
 If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
 If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
 If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.

Handling Precautions

 Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
 If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera
yourself and make sure it is working properly.
 If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.
 If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.

LCD Monitor
 Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
 If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
 Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
 Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
 Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
 Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
 Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
 Store the card in a case.
 Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Handling Precautions

Smudges Adhering to the Front of the Sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the
camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If visible spots
remain on the image, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens
with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to avoid
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Nomenclature
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam
(p.166/103)

EF Lens mount index (p.45)
Flash sync contacts

Mode Dial (p.30)

Hot shoe (p.171)

AF area
selection button (p.105)

EF-S Lens mount index (p.45)

Power switch (p.40)

Flash button (p.166)

ISO speed
setting button (p.122)

Focal plane mark
(p.78)

Display
button (p.61)

Strap mount
(p.33)

Shutter button
(p.50)

Speaker
(p.290)

Red-eye
reduction/
Self-timer
lamp
(p.167/114)

Built-in
microphones
(p.222)

Remote
control sensor
(p.163, 350)
Terminal
cover

Grip
Mirror (p.163, 274)
Contacts (p.25)
Lens mount
Lens lock pin

Lens release button
(p.46)
Depth-of-field preview
button (p.154)

Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal (p.301, 320, 402)
Body cap (p.45)

Remote control terminal
(p.351)
External microphone
IN terminal (p.251)
HDMI mini OUT terminal
(p.298)

Live View shooting/
Movie shooting button (p.192/222)

Aperture/Exposure
compensation button

Dioptric adjustment knob (p.49)

Quick Control button (p.51)

Viewfinder eyepiece

AE lock/
FE lock button/Index/
Reduce button
(p.162/169/278, 280)

Eyecup (p.351)
Info button
(p.61, 97, 194, 227, 266)

AF point selection/
Magnify button
(p.106/280)

Menu button
(p.53)

LCD monitor/
Touch screen
(p.53, 257/
56, 281, 292)

Access lamp
(p.38)
Card slot cover
(p.37)

DC cord hole
(p.349)
<0> Setting
button (p.53)

p (N-Mark)
Serial number
Tripod socket

Battery compartment cover
release lever (p.36)

Playback button (p.97)

Battery compartment cover
(p.36)

: Cross keys (p.53)
White balance selection button (p.132)
Picture Style selection button (p.125)
Drive mode selection button (p.112, 114)
AF operation selection button (p.100)

Erase button (p.304)

Card slot (p.37)

Shooting Function Settings (in Creative Zone modes, p.30)
Shutter speed
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation
amount (p.159)
AEB range (p.160)

Aperture
c Main Dial pointer
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.136)
ISO speed (p.122)

Highlight tone priority
(p.339)

Picture Style
(p.125)

y Flash exposure
compensation
(p.168, 189)

AF operation (p.100)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
MF
Manual Focus

Image-recording quality
(p.116)
73 Large/Fine
83 Large/Normal
74 Medium/Fine
84 Medium/Normal
7a Small 1/Fine
8a Small 1/Normal
b Small 2 (Fine)
c Small 3 (Fine)
1+73
RAW+Large/Fine
1 RAW

Quick Control icon
(p.52)
Battery check (p.41)
zxcn
AF area selection mode (p.104)
White balance (p.132)
Q Auto
W Daylight
E Shade
R Cloudy
Y Tungsten light
U White fluorescent light
I Flash
O Custom
Eye-Fi transmission status (p.352)
Metering mode (p.157)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted average
metering

Possible shots
Possible shots
during WB bracketing
Self-timer countdown
Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.137)
u White balance correction (p.134)
B White balance bracketing (p.135)
Drive mode (p.112, 114)
u Single shooting
i Continuous shooting
B Silent single shooting
M Silent continuous shooting
Q Self-timer:10 sec./Remote control
l Self-timer:2 sec.
q Self-timer:Continuous
GPS connection indicator

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Viewfinder Information
Spot metering circle (p.157)
Single-point AF (Manual selection) (p.104)
Focusing screen

Zone AF (Manual selection of zone) (p.104)
19-point automatic selection AF
(p.104)

AF point (p.104)

Grid (p.62)
Area AF frame
(p.104)

Aspect ratio line
(p.120)
Flicker detection
(p.63, 144)
ISO speed
White
balance
correction
Focus indicator

AE lock/AEB
in-progress

Maximum burst
<0> Monochrome
shooting

Flash-ready
Improper FE lock warning

ISO speed
High-speed sync
FE lock/FEB in-progress
Flash exposure
compensation
Shutter speed
Bulb exposure (buLb)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)
No card warning (Card)
Card error (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Error code (Err)

Highlight tone priority
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
AEB range
Red-eye reduction lamp ON
AF point selection
(M AF, SEL N, SEL AF)
Aperture (p.152)

The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Mode Dial
The Mode Dial consists of two functionally categorized zones: one for
the Creative Zone modes and one for the Basic Zone modes.
Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for
shooting various subjects as desired.
d : Program AE (p.148)
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.150)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.152)
a : Manual exposure (p.155)
Basic Zone
All you do is press the shutter button.
The camera sets everything to suit the
subject or scene for shooting.
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.66)
7 : Flash Off (p.71)
C : Creative Auto (p.72)
2 : Portrait (p.76)
3 : Landscape (p.77)
4 : Close-up (p.78)
5 : Sports (p.79)
8: Special scene (p.80)
C : Kids (p.81)
P : Food (p.82)
x : Candlelight (p.83)
6 : Night Portrait (p.84)
F : Handheld Night Scene (p.85)
G : HDR Backlight Control (p.86)

Lens without a Distance Scale

Focusing ring (p.111, 216)
Focus mode switch (p.45)
Hood mount (p.47)

Zoom position index (p.46)

Filter thread
(front of lens)

Zoom ring (p.46)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.48)

Contacts (p.25)

Lens mount index (p.45)

Battery Charger LC-E17
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (p.34).
Power plug

Charge lamp
Full-charge lamp
Battery pack slot

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Battery Charger LC-E17E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (p.34).
Battery pack slot

Full-charge lamp
Charge lamp

Power cord socket

Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
Attaching the Provided Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
The eyepiece cover is also
attached to the strap (p.351).

Charging the Battery

Remove the protective cover.
 Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.

the battery.
2 Attach
 As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
 To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E17

the battery.
3 Recharge
For LC-E17
 As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
Full-charge lamp
Charge lamp

For LC-E17E
 Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
 Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp lights up in orange.
 When the battery is fully recharged,
the full-charge lamp will light up in
green.

 It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on
the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
 For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hours).

Charging the Battery

Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
 Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
 Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose
its capacity.
 After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
 When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small
amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover
(provided) attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may
lower the battery’s performance.
 The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/
60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available
plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any
portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can
damage the battery charger.
 If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.348) and purchase a
new battery.
 After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
at least 5 sec.
 Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E17.
 Battery Pack LP-E17 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with
an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.

Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17 into the camera. The
camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and
darkens when the battery is removed.

Installing the Battery

Open the cover.
 Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.

the battery.
2 Insert
 Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
 Insert the battery until it locks in
place.

the cover.
3 Close
 Press the cover until it snaps shut.

Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
 Press the battery release lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
 To prevent short circuiting of the battery
contacts, be sure to attach the protective
cover (provided, p.34) to the battery.
After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to forcefully
swing it back further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.

Installing and Removing the Card
The card (sold separately) can be an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory
card. SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS-I can also be used.
The captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to
enable writing and erasing.

Installing the Card

1
Write-protect switch

Open the cover.
 Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.

the card.
2 Insert
 As shown by the illustration, face
the card’s label side toward you
and insert it until it clicks in place.

the cover.
3 Close
 Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
 When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
will be displayed on the LCD monitor.
Possible shots

 The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
 Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from shooting without a card inserted (p.256).

Installing and Removing the Card

Removing the Card

Open the cover.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
 If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.

the card.
2 Remove
 Gently push in the card, then let go to
eject it.
 Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.

 When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when the AC Adapter
Kit is used).
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.261).
 If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.59). The card
may then return to normal.
 Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do
not expose the contacts to dust or water. If a smudge adheres to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
 Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).

Using the LCD Monitor
After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live
View shooting, shoot movies, and play back images and movies. You
can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.

Flip out the LCD monitor.

the LCD monitor.
2 Rotate
 When the LCD monitor is swung out,

180°
90°
175°

you can rotate it up, down, or over
180° to face the subject.
 The indicated angle is only
approximate.

it toward you.
3 Face
 Normally, use the camera with the
LCD monitor facing you.

 Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD
monitor.
 When Remote Switch RS-60E3 or an external microphone is connected
to the camera, the rotation angle range of the flipped out LCD monitor
will be limited.

 When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen
facing inward. This will protect the screen.
 During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor
toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.

Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 42 to set the date/time/zone.

: The camera turns on. You can
shoot movies (p.222).
: The camera turns on. You can
shoot still photos.
: The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.

Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display
.
 You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.50) to stop cleaning and take a picture.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.

3 Auto Power Off
 To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after
approx. 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again,
just press the shutter button halfway (p.50).
 You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.257).

If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.

Turning on the Power

z Checking the Battery Level
When the power is turned on, the battery level will be indicated in one of
the four levels.
z : Battery level is sufficient.
x : Battery level is low, but the
camera can still be used.
c : Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
n : Recharge the battery.
Number of Possible Shots

(Approx. number of shots)

Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)

 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
 Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E18 (sold separately)
• With LP-E17 x 2: approx, twice the shots without the battery grip.

 Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
 The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
 The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the battery power may exhaust faster.
 For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 193.
 See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery’s condition (p.348).

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone are
reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps
below, making sure to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

Display the menu screen.
 Press the button to display
the menu screen.

the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
 Press the keys to select
the [52] tab.
 Press the keys to select
[Date/Time/Zone], then press <0>.

the time zone.
3 Set
 [London] is set by default.
 Press the keys to select
the time zone box.
 Press <0> so is displayed.
 Press the keys to select
the time zone, then press <0>.
(Returns to .)
 The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 54-55.
 In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time
difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do
not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference
with UTC.

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

the date and time.
4 Set
 Press the keys to select
the number.
 Press <0> so is displayed.
 Press the keys to set the
number, then press <0>. (Returns
to .)

the daylight saving time.
5 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Press the keys to select [Y].
 Press <0> so is displayed.
 Press the keys to select
[Z], then press <0>.
 When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.

the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the keys to select
[OK], then press <0>.
 The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
The date/time/zone settings may be reset in the following cases. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
• When the camera is stored without the battery.
• When the camera’s battery becomes exhausted.
• When the camera is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a
prolonged period.
 The date/time that were set will start when you select [OK] in step 6.
 After changing the time zone, check that the correct date and time are set.

3 Selecting the Interface Language

Display the menu screen.
 Press the button to display
the menu screen.

the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
 Press the keys to select
the [52] tab.
 Press the keys to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.

the desired language.
3 Set
 Press the keys to select
the language, then press <0>.
 The interface language will change.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The
camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

Attaching a Lens

Remove the caps.
 Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.

the lens.
2 Attach
 Align the lens’s red or white index

with the camera’s index matching the
same color. Turn the lens as shown
by the arrow until it clicks in place.
Red index

the lens’s focus mode switch
3 Set
to .
 stands for autofocus.
 stands for manual focus.

4 Remove the front lens cap.
Minimizing Dust
 When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
 When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
 Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Zooming
Turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
 If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the focus.

Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
 Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.
 Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
 To owners of the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens:
You can prevent the lens from extending out while you are carrying it
around. Set the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle end, then slide the
zoom ring lock lever to . The zoom ring can be locked only at
the wide-angle end.
 Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
 When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to <2>.
 If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
 If you purchased a lens kit with the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
lens, EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, or EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6
IS STM lens, see “Handling Precautions” on page 383.

Angle of View
Since the image sensor size is smaller
than the 35mm film format, the angle
of view of an attached lens will be
equivalent to that of a lens with approx.
1.6x of the focal length indicated.

Image sensor size (Approx.)
(22.3 x 14.9 mm /
0.88 x 0.59 in.)
35mm image size
(36 x 24 mm /
1.42 x 0.94 in.)

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Attaching a Lens Hood
A lens hood can block unwanted light and prevent rain, snow, dust, etc.
adhering to the front of the lens. When storing the lens in a bag, etc.,
you can also attach the hood in reverse.
 If there is no index mark on the lens and hood:

Attach the lens hood.
 Turn the hood as shown by the arrow
to attach it securely.

 If there is an index mark on the lens and hood:

Align the red dots on the hood
and lens edges, then turn the
hood as shown by the arrow.

the hood as shown in the
2 Turn
illustration.
 Turn the hood clockwise until it
attaches securely.

 If the hood is not attached properly, it may obstruct the image’s
periphery, making the image look dark.
 When attaching or detaching the hood, grasp the base of the hood to
turn it. Grasping the hood’s edges to turn it may deform the hood,
resulting in failure to turn.
 When using the camera’s built-in flash, detach the hood. Otherwise, the
hood will obstruct part of the flash.

Lens Image Stabilizer
When you use the IS lens’s built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is
corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is
based on the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.

Set the IS switch to <1>.
 Set also the camera’s power switch to
<1>.

the shutter button halfway.
2 Press
 The Image Stabilizer will operate.
the picture.
3 Take
 When the picture looks steady in the
viewfinder, press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.

 The Image Stabilizer will not be effective if the subject moves during the
exposure.
 For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <2>. If <1> is set, Image
Stabilizer misoperation may occur.
 The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as
on a rocking boat.
 The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens’s focus mode switch set
to either or .
 When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to <1>
with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to
<2> is recommended.
 The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a
monopod.
 With the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens, EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6
IS STM lens, or EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM lens, the Image
Stabilizer mode will be switched automatically to suit the shooting
conditions.

Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
 Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look the
sharpest.
If the camera dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is
recommended.

Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera
shake.

Horizontal shooting

Vertical shooting

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 191.

Basic Operation

Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
(0).
While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the LCD monitor is turned off
(p.270).

Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.

Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
 If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway
first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it
completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes
the picture.
 Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button
halfway.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.

Press the button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear.

the desired functions.
2 Set
 Press the cross keys to select a
function.
 The selected function and Feature
guide (p.64) will appear.
 Turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
Basic Zone modes

Creative Zone modes

the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed.

 For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and their setting
procedures, see page 89.
 In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen
(p.56).

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Sample Quick Control Screen
Aperture (p.152)
Shutter speed (p.150)
Shooting mode* (p.30)

Highlight tone priority* (p.339)

Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
(p.159/160)
Picture Style (p.125)

ISO speed (p.122)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.168)
Built-in flash settings
(p.176)

AF operation (p.100)
Return
White balance (p.132)

Image-recording quality (p.116)

AF area selection mode (p.105)

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.136)

White balance correction (p.134)

Drive mode (p.112)

Metering mode (p.157)

White balance bracketing (p.135)

* Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.

Function Setting Screen

 Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function’s setting screen
will appear.
 Press the keys or turn the
<6> dial to change the settings.
There are also some functions that
are set by pressing the ,
, or button.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the Quick Control screen.
 When you select (p.104) and
press the button, the
previous screen will reappear.

3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the imagerecording quality, date and time, etc.
button
<0> button
cross keys

Menu Screen
The menu tabs and items displayed will differ depending on the
shooting mode.
Basic Zone modes

Creative Zone modes
3Playback
ALive View shooting
zShooting

5Set-up
9My Menu

3 Menu Operations

Menu Setting Procedure

Display the menu screen.
 Press the button to display
the menu screen.

a tab.
2 Select
 Press the keys of the
cross keys to select a tab (group of
functions).
 For example, in this manual, “the
[z3] tab” refers to the screen
displayed when the third z
(Shooting) tab from the left [t] is
selected.

the desired item.
3 Select
 Press the keys of the cross
keys to select the item, then press
<0>.

the setting.
4 Select
 Press the or
keys of the cross keys to select the
desired setting. (Some settings
require you to press either the
or keys to select
those settings.)
 The current setting is indicated in
blue.

the desired setting.
5 Set
 Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the button to return to
the shooting function settings display.

3 Menu Operations

 In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab.
 In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.56).
 The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the button to display the menu screen.
 To cancel, press the button.
 For details about each menu item, see page 362.

Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When [Multi Shot
Noise Reduction] is set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.

You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.

Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.
With [Clear all camera settings] under [54: Clear settings], you can reset
the menu functions to the default settings (p.267).

d Using the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with
your fingers.

Tap
Quick Control (Sample display)
 Use your finger to tap on (touch
briefly and then remove your finger
from) the LCD monitor.
 By tapping, you can select menus,
icons, etc., displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When touch-screen operation is
possible, a frame will appear around
the icon (except on menu screens).
For example, when you tap on [Q],
the Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping on [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.

Operations possible by tapping on the screen
 Setting menu functions after pressing the button
 Quick Control
 Setting functions after pressing the , , , ,
, , or button
 Touch shutter during Live View shooting
 Setting functions during Live View shooting
 Setting functions during movie shooting
 Playback operations

d Using the Touch Screen

Drag
Menu screen (Sample display)
 Slide your finger while touching the
LCD monitor.

Scale display (Sample display)

Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen
 Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the button
 Setting a scale control
 Quick Control
 Setting functions during Live View shooting
 Setting functions during movie shooting
 Playback operations

3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to y],
the beep will not sound during touch
operations.

d Using the Touch Screen

3 Touch Control Settings

Select [Touch control].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Touch
control], then press <0>.

the touch control setting.
2 Set
 Select the preferred setting, then
press <0>.
 [Standard] is the normal setting.
 [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch response than [Standard]. Try
using both settings and select the one
you prefer.
 To disable touch-screen operations,
select [Disable].

Cautions for Touch Screen Operations
 Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
 Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.
 If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch
screen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a case, turn
off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.
 Do not attach any protective sheet (commercially available) or sticker on
the LCD monitor. It may make the touch operation response slow.
 If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
response may be slower.

3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure
there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the
images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.

Select [Format card].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.

the card.
2 Format
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The card will be formatted.
 When the formatting is completed,
the menu will reappear.

 For low-level formatting, press the
button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark , then
select [OK].

3 Formatting the Card

Execute [Format card] in the following cases:





The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.382).

Low-level Formatting
 Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase data on the card.
 Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
 You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as
usual.

 When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
 Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software on the card must be
installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
 The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
 This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

Switching the LCD Monitor Display
The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu
screen, captured images, etc.

Shooting Settings
 When you turn on the power, the
shooting settings will be displayed.
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the display will turn off.
And when you let go of the shutter
button, the display will turn on.
 You can also turn off the display by
pressing the button. Press the
button again to turn on the display.
 By pressing the button, you
can toggle the LCD monitor display
between the shooting settings (p.28)
and the camera settings (p.266).

 Appears when you press the
button. Press the
button again to return to the
shooting settings screen.

 Appears when you press the
button. Press the button
again to return to the shooting
settings screen.

 You can set [52: LCD off/on btn] so that the LCD monitor does not turn
off and on (p.270).
 Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing
the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately.

lDisplaying the Grid
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt
or compose the shot.

Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.

[Grid display].
2 Select
 Select [Grid display], then press
<0>.

[Show].
3 Select
 Select [Show], then press <0>.
 When you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.

You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
before you start shooting a movie (p.204, 250).

Displaying the Flicker DetectionK
If you set this function, will appear in the viewfinder when
the camera detects flicker caused by the blinking of the light source. By
default, flicker detection is set to [Show].

Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.

[Flicker detection].
2 Select
 Select [Flicker detection], then
press <0>.

[Show].
3 Select
 Select [Show], then press <0>.

If you set [z3: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable], you can shoot with
reduced unevenness of exposure caused by the flicker (p.144).

Feature Guide
The Feature guide appears when you change the shooting mode or set
a shooting function, Live View shooting, movie shooting, or Quick
Control for playback, and displays a brief description of that mode,
function or option. It also displays a description when you select a
function or option on the Quick Control screen. The Feature guide turns
off when you tap on the description or proceed with the operation.
 Shooting mode (Sample)

 Quick Control (Sample)

Shooting settings

Live View shooting

3 Disabling the Feature Guide
Select [Feature guide].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Feature
guide], then press <0>.
 Select [Disable], then press <0>.

Basic Shooting and
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes
on the Mode Dial for best results and how to play back
images.
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot while the
camera sets everything automatically (p.89, 354). Also, to
prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations,
advanced shooting function settings cannot be changed.

If you set the Mode Dial to <8> when the LCD monitor is off,
press the button to check the shooting mode before shooting
(p.80).

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.69).

1
Area AF frame

Set the Mode Dial to .

the Area AF frame over the
2 Aim
subject.
 All the AF points will be used to focus,
and the camera will focus on the
closest object.
 Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.

on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens focusing ring will rotate to focus.
 The AF point(s) that achieve(s) focus
will be displayed. At the same time,
the beeper will sound and the focus
indicator in the viewfinder will
light up.
 In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
 If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.

Focus indicator

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
 After you finish shooting, push down
the built-in flash with your fingers.
The mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you did not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to a Creative Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than
, then shoot again (p.125).

FAQ
 The focus indicator blinks and focus is not achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
the shutter button halfway (p.50). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
 When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
 Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the
picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting
up.

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

 The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator
does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus indicator does not light up.) You can take
sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that the focus lock (p.69) will not work in this case.
 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to (manual focus),
set it to (autofocus).
 The flash fired even though it was daylight.
For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s
dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control
to set [Flash firing] to [b] (p.88) or set the <7> (Flash Off) mode
and shoot (p.71).
 The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.
Move further from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash
photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture
may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
 In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AFassist beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet. The
built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is
normal and not a malfunction.
 When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because
the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the
subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before
taking the flash picture.

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot

Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a
still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot
while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <5>
).

Shooting a Moving Subject

In the mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the
subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long
as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while
pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 191.

Display the Live View image on
the LCD monitor.
 Press the button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.

on the subject.
2 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.

the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the button to end the
Live View shooting.
You can also rotate the LCD monitor for different angles (p.39).

7 Disabling Flash
The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings
automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited such as
in a museum or an aquarium, use the <7> (Flash Off) mode.

Shooting Tips
 Prevent camera shake if the numeric display in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the
camera.
 Take portraits without flash.
In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is
taken. Any movement by the subject during shooting may result in
the subject being blurred in the picture.

C Creative Auto Shooting
In the mode, you can set the following functions for shooting:
(1) Extra Effect Shot, (2) Ambience-based shots, (3) Background blur,
(4) Drive mode, and (5) Flash firing. The default settings are the same
as the mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.

Set the Mode Dial to .

the button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.

the desired function.
3 Set
 Press the cross keys to select a
function.
 The selected function and Feature
guide (p.64) will appear.
 Press <0> to set the function.
 For the setting procedure and details
on each function, see pages 73-75.

the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.

C Creative Auto Shooting

(1)
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO speed

If you set (1), (2) or (3) when the camera is set for Live View shooting,
you can see the effect on the screen before you start shooting.
(1) Extra Effect Shot
• You can select any of the following effects for shooting: Creative filters
(p.200), Picture Styles (p.125), and Ambience-based shots (p.90).
• Press the keys to select [
: Enable]. Turn the <6>
dial to select a shooting effect and shoot.
• When you take a picture, two images will be recorded. One with
the effect applied and one without. Both images will be displayed
together immediately after you take the picture. The image without
the effect is displayed on the left and the one with the effect on the
right.
Registering your favorite shooting effects
• During the image review immediately after shooting and during
playback, the image applied with the effect will have the [s
]
icon. After you press the <0> button and then the button,
you can check which shooting effect is applied.
• You can register up to two shooting effects under [9:Favorite
effect].
• When you select the registered [9:Favorite effect], you can
shoot with that shooting effect applied. You can also overwrite the
[9:Favorite effect].
 If you are using an Eye-Fi card and have set it to erase images after their
transfer, the image without the effect will not be displayed during the
playback immediately after shooting.
 The Live View image displayed with Extra Effect Shot applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual photo.

C Creative Auto Shooting

(2) Ambience-based shots
• You can select and shoot with the ambience you want to convey in
your images.
• Press the keys to select the ambience. For details, see
page 90.
(3) Background blur
• If [OFF] is set, the degree of background blur will change
depending on the brightness.
• If it is set to any setting other than [OFF], you can adjust the
background blur regardless of the brightness.
• If you turn the <6> dial to move the cursor to the right, the
background will look sharper.
• Turning the <6> dial to move the cursor to the left will blur the
subject’s background. Note that depending on the lens’s maximum
aperture (smallest f/number), certain slider adjustments may not
be selectable.
• If you use Live View shooting, you can see how the image is
blurred in front of and behind the point of focus. When you turn the
<6> dial, [Simulating blur] will be displayed on the LCD
monitor.
• If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Portraits” on
page 76.
• Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background
may not look so blurred.
• This function cannot be set if you use flash. If has been set
and you set background blur, will be set automatically.
 If [Simulating blur] is effective during Live View shooting, the image
displayed with (p.194) blinking may have more noise than the
actual image being recorded, or it may look dark.
 You cannot set both (1) Extra Effect Shot and (2) Ambience-based shots
at the same time.
 You cannot set both (1) Extra Effect Shot and (3) Background blur at the
same time.

C Creative Auto Shooting

(4) Drive mode: Use the <6> dial to make the selection.
Single shooting:
Shoot one image at a time.
Continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely,
shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to
approx. 5.0 shots per second.
Silent single shooting*:
Single shooting with less shooting sound than .
Silent continuous shooting*:
Continuous shooting (max. approx. 3.0 shots per
second) with less shooting sound than .
Self-timer: 10sec./remote control:
The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button. A remote controller can also be used.
Self-timer: 2 sec.:
The picture is taken 2 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
Self-timer: Continuous:
Press the keys to set the number of
multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer.
10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set
number of multiple shots will be taken.
* Cannot be set during Live View shooting.

(5) Flash firing: Turn the <6> dial to select the desired setting.
Auto flash : The flash fires automatically when necessary.
Flash on : The flash fires at all times.
Flash off : The flash is disabled.

 When using the self-timer, see the
notes on page 114.
 When using , see “Disabling Flash” on page 71.
 If you have set Extra Effect Shot, 1+73, 1, and
cannot be set.
 If you have set background blur, you cannot use flash.

2 Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.

Shooting Tips
 Select the location where the distance between the subject and
the background is the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better against an uncluttered dark background.
 Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
 Focus on the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face lights up. For close-ups of
the face, focus on the eyes.

The default setting is (Continuous shooting). If you hold down the
shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture subtle changes in the
subject’s pose and facial expression (max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.).

3 Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and
very sharp and crisp images.

Shooting Tips
 With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth
to landscapes.
 Shooting night scenes.
The <3> mode is also good for night scenes because it disables
the built-in flash. When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to
prevent camera shake.

 The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

4 Shooting Close-ups
When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).

Shooting Tips
 Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out
better.
 Move in as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as on them. The lens
minimum focusing distance is measured from the (focal
plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too
close to the subject, the focus indicator will blink.
If you use flash and the bottom of the picture looks unusually dark,
move away from the subject.
 With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.

5 Shooting Moving Subjects
Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a
running person or a moving vehicle.

Shooting Tips
 Use a telephoto lens.
The use of a telephoto lens is recommended for shooting from a
distance.
 Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF frame. During
autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly. If focus cannot
be achieved, the focus indicator will blink.
The default setting is (Continuous shooting). When you want
to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold
down the shutter button, you will be able to maintain autofocusing
during continuous shooting of the subject’s movement (max. approx.
5.0 shots per sec.).
 Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera
steady and shoot.
 During Live View shooting, One-Shot AF will apply (p.101).
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

8: Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when
you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.

Set the Mode Dial to <8>.

the button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.

a shooting mode.
3 Select
 Press the cross keys to select
the desired shooting mode’s icon.
 Turn the <6> dial to select a
shooting mode.
 You can also select the shooting
mode icon and press <0> to display
a selection of shooting modes from
which you can select one.

Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode
Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Page
6

Handheld Night Scene

HDR Backlight Control

C Shooting Children
When you want to continuously focus and shoot children running
around, use (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy.

Shooting Tips
 Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF frame. During
autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly. If focus cannot
be achieved, the focus indicator will blink.
 Shoot continuously.
The default setting is (Continuous shooting). When you want
to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold
down the shutter button, you will be able to maintain autofocusing
during continuous shooting of the subject’s changing facial
expressions and movement (max. approx. 5.0 shots per sec.).

 While the flash is recycling, “IbuSY” is displayed in the viewfinder, and a
picture cannot be taken. Take the picture after this display turns off.
During Live View shooting, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD monitor, and
you cannot view the subject.
 During Live View shooting, One-Shot AF will apply (p.101).

P Shooting Food
When shooting food, use (Food). The photo will look bright and
vivid.

Shooting Tips
 Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. Food photos with a reddish tinge
usually make the food look more vivid. To increase the food’s
reddish tinge, set it toward [Warm tone]. Set it toward [Cool tone] if
it looks too red.
 Shoot the subject in close-up.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to shoot the food in
close-up.
 Avoid using flash.
If you use flash, the light may reflect off the dish or food and results
in unnatural shadows. By default, (Flash off) is set. Try to
prevent camera shake when shooting in low-light conditions.
 Since this mode sets the color tone to make food look vivid, human
subjects may be shot in an unsuitable skin tone.
 If you use flash, the [Color tone] setting will switch to the standard
setting.

x Shooting Candlelight Portraits
When shooting a human subject in candlelight, use (Candlelight).
The candlelight color tones will be retained in the photo.

Shooting Tips
 Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder over the subject, then shoot.
 Prevent camera shake if the shutter speed in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the
camera.
 Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the candlelight’s reddish
tinge, set it toward [Warm tone]. Set it toward [Cool tone] if it looks
too red.
 Live View shooting cannot be used.
 The built-in flash will not fire. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be
emitted (p.103).
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.

6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Using a tripod is
recommended.

Shooting Tips
 Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
 Check the subject’s brightness.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a
good exposure of the subject.
It is recommended to play back the image after shooting to check
the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and
shoot again.
 Also shoot in other shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with and is recommended.
 Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
 If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
up briefly after the picture is taken.
 See the cautions on page 87.

F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)
Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results.
However, the (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot
night scenes even while handholding the camera. Four shots are taken
continuously for each picture, and the resulting one image with reduced
camera shake is recorded.

Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
 For shots of people, turn on the flash.
If you want to include people in the night scene shot, press the
button to set (Flash on). To take a nice portrait, the first shot will
use flash. Tell the subject not to move until all four continuous shots
are taken.

See the cautions on page 87.

G Shooting Backlit Scenes
When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the
(HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this
mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This
results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the
clipped shadows caused by backlighting.

Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.

 The flash will not fire. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be emitted
(p.103).
 See the cautions on page 87.
HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Cautions for both <6> (Night Portrait) and (Handheld Night
Scene)
 During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus on dots of light
such as in a night scene. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode
switch to and focus manually.
 The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the
actual image shot.
Cautions for (Handheld Night Scene)
 When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the
camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
 If you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots may not
align correctly. This can result in a blurry picture.
 If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background that is also
illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This can result in a
blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also appear.
 External flash coverage:
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom
position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’s zoom position.
• If you have to set the flash coverage manually, set the light-emitting
unit (flash head) to the wide-angle end before shooting.
Cautions for <6> (Night Portrait)
 During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus when the face of
the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch
to and focus manually.
Cautions for both (Handheld Night Scene) and (HDR
Backlight Control)
 Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected. If 1+73 or 1 has been set,
73 will be set.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly
misaligned due to camera shake.
 It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after
shooting. During the processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed,
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
 If the shooting mode is set to or , direct printing is not possible.

Q Quick Control

Cautions for (HDR Backlight Control)
 Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
 HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit
scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.
 When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright, for example for normally
lit scenes, the image may look unnatural because of the applied HDR effect.

Q Quick Control
In Basic Zone modes when the shooting function settings screen is
displayed, you can press the button to display the Quick Control
screen. The tables on the next page show the functions that can be set
with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode.

Example: Portrait mode

the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone
1 Set
mode.
the button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.

the functions.
3 Set
 Press the cross keys to select a
function. (This step is not necessary
in the 7 mode.)
 The selected function and Feature
guide (p.64) will appear.
 Press the keys or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
 You can also select from a list by
selecting a function and pressing
<0>.

Q Quick Control

Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o:

Default setting k: User selectable

Drive mode
(p.112)

A
u: Single shooting
o
i: Continuous shooting
k
B: Silent single shooting
k
M: Silent continuous shooting k
Q (10 sec.)
k
l (2 sec.)
k
q (Continuous)
k
a: Automatic firing
o
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
k
b: Flash off
k

7
o
k
k
k
k
k
k

Ambience-based shots (p.90)

C
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k

Light/scene-based shots (p.94)

: Not selectable
2
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k

3
o
k
k
k
k
k
k

4
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k

5
k
o
k
k
k
k
k

Background blur (p.74)
Color tone (p.82, 83)

Extra Effect Shot (p.73)

Function
u: Single shooting
i: Continuous shooting
Drive mode
(p.112)

B: Silent single shooting
M: Silent continuous shooting
Q (10 sec.)
l (2 sec.)
q (Continuous)
a: Automatic firing

D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off

Ambience-based shots (p.90)
Light/scene-based shots (p.94)

C
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k

P
o
k
k
k
k
k
k

8
x
6
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o

F
o
k
k
k
k
k
k

G
o
k
k
k
k
k
k

Background blur (p.74)
Color tone (p.82, 83)
Extra Effect Shot (p.73)

* If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the
functions will revert to the default settings (except the self-timer).

Shoot by Ambience Selection
Except in the , <7>, and Basic Zone modes, you can
select the ambience for shooting.
Ambience

C/2/3/4/
8
C/6/F P/x
5

m Standard setting

Low / Standard / Strong

Low / Standard / Strong

Low / Standard / Strong

Low / Standard / Strong

Low / Medium / High

Low / Medium / High

Blue / B/W / Sepia

Ambience Effect
No setting

Low / Standard / Strong

Set the Mode Dial to any of the
following modes: , <2>,
<3>, <4>, <5>, or <8>.
 If the shooting mode is <8>, set
one of the following: ,
,
, <6>, or .

the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the button to display the
Live View image (except ).

the Quick Control screen,
3 On
select the desired ambience.
 Press the button (7).
 Press the keys to select
[m Standard setting]. [Ambiencebased shots] will appear on the
screen.

Shoot by Ambience Selection

 Press the keys to select
the desired ambience.
 The LCD monitor will display how the
image will look with the selected
ambience.

the ambience effect.
4 Set
 Press the keys to select
the effect so that [Effect] appears at
the bottom.
 Press the keys to select
the desired effect.

the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [m
Standard setting].

 The Live View image displayed with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual image.
 Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.
 In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may
not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual image.
Set [52: LCD brightness] to 4, and look at the Live View image so that
the LCD monitor is unaffected by outside light.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the button after step 1 and set [Ambience-based
shots] and [Effect].

Shoot by Ambience Selection

Ambience Settings
mStandard setting
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.
n Vivid
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more
impressive than with [m Standard setting].
o Soft
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,
flowers, etc.
p Warm
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,
pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.
t Intense
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living
subject stand out more.
u Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.

Shoot by Ambience Selection

v Brighter
The picture will look brighter.
x Darker
The picture will look darker.
y Monochrome
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be blue, black and white, or sepia. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
In the <2>, <3>, <4>, <5>, and Basic Zone modes, you can
shoot with the settings matching the lighting or scene type. Normally,
[e Default setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting
condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eyes.
For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and
[Ambience-based shots] (p.90), you should first set [Light/scenebased shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the
LCD monitor.
8

Lighting or Scene 2

e Default setting

i Tungsten light

j Fluorescent light

Set the Mode Dial to any of the
following modes: <2>, <3>,
<4>, <5>, or <8>.
 For <8>, set it to .

the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the button to display the
Live View image.

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type

the Quick Control screen,
3 On
select the lighting or scene type.
 Press the button (7).
 Press the keys to select
[e Default setting]. [Light/scenebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
 Press the keys to select
the lighting or scene type.
 The resulting image with the selected
lighting or scene type will be
displayed.

the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [e Default
setting].
 If you use flash, the setting will switch to [e Default setting]. (However,
the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that is set.)
 If you want to set this together with [Ambience-based shots], set the
lighting or scene type that best matches the ambience you have set. In
the case of [Sunset], for example, warm colors will become prominent so
the ambience you set may not work well.

If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the button after step 1 and set [Light/scene-based
shots].

Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type

Lighting or Scene Type Settings
e Default setting
Default setting suited for most subjects.
f Daylight
For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies
and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.
g Shade
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look
too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.
h Cloudy
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.
i Tungsten light
For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange
color cast caused by tungsten lighting.
j Fluorescent light
For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of
fluorescent lighting.
r Sunset
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.

x Image Playback
The easiest way to play back images is explained below. For more
details on the playback procedure, see page 277.

Play back the image.
 Press the button.
 The last image captured or played
back will appear.

an image.
2 Select
 To play back images starting with the
last image captured, press the
key. To play back images starting with
the first captured image, press the
key.
 Each time you press the
button, the information display will
change.

Basic information
display

Shooting information display

x Image Playback

the image playback.
3 Exit
 Press the button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.

Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.97), you can press
the keys to change the shooting information displayed at the
screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 307-308.
Detailed information

GPS information

Lens / Histogram information

Lens aberration correction information

White balance information

Color space / Noise reduction information

Picture Style information

 The information displayed varies depending on the shooting mode and
settings.
 If GPS information is not recorded for the image, the GPS information
screen will not be displayed.

Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The 19 AF points in the viewfinder
make AF shooting suitable for a
wide variety of subjects and
scenes.

You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
 The J icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.30).
 In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation and AF point (AF
area selection mode) are set automatically.

stands for autofocus. stands for manual focus.

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK
You can select the AF (autofocus) operation characteristics suiting the
shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF
operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to .

the button.
2 Press
 [AF operation] will appear.

the AF operation.
3 Select
 Press the keys to select
the desired AF operation, then press
<0>.

on the subject.
4 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway. The
camera will then autofocus in the
selected AF operation.

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will be displayed,
and the focus indicator in the
viewfinder will also light up.
 With evaluative metering, the
AF point
exposure setting will be set at the
Focus indicator
same time focus is achieved.
 While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

 If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot or see “Subjects
Difficult to Focus on” (p.110) and try to focus again.
 If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
 After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is
convenient when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered
by the Area AF frame.
 When a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing function is used,
after achieving focus, you can focus manually by turning the lens
focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway.

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused on continuously.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When the AF area selection mode is set to 19-point automatic
selection AF (p.104), the camera first uses the manually-selected AF
point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject moves away from
the manually-selected AF point, focus tracking continues as long as
the subject is covered by the Area AF frame.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator in the viewfinder will not light up.

AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
 After the subject is focused on in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving
subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator in
the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.

f: Changing the Autofocus OperationK

AF Points Lighting Up in Red
By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in lowlight conditions. In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have
the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved (p.342).

AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. This illuminates the
subject to help autofocusing.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted from the built-in flash in the
following shooting modes: <7>, <3>, <5>, and .
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.
 The built-in flash makes a sound when firing continuously. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
 The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
 In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the
button (p.166), the AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary. Note
that depending on the setting for [4: AF-assist beam firing] under [54:
Custom Functions (C.Fn)], AF-assist beam will not be emitted (p.340).

S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointK
19 AF points are provided for autofocusing. You can select the AF area
selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.

AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of three AF area selection modes. See the next
page for the selection procedure.

h: Single-point AF (Manual
selection)
Select one AF point to focus.

q: Zone AF (Manual selection of
zone)
The 19 AF points are divided into five
zones for focusing.

r: 19-point automatic selection
AF
All the AF points are used to focus. This
mode is set automatically in Basic
Zone modes (except ).
Area AF frame

S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointK

Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

Press the or button
(9).
 Look through the viewfinder and
press the or button.

the button.
2 Press
 Each time you press the

AF area selection mode

button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
 The AF area selection mode currently
set is indicated on the top of the
viewfinder.
h: Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
q: Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
r: 19-point automatic selection
AF

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if you set [5: AF area selection
method] to [1: j9Main Dial], you can select the AF area selection mode
by pressing the or button, then turning the <6> dial (p.340).

S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointK

Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone. If 19-point automatic
selection AF + AI Servo AF has been set, you can select any position
where AI Servo AF is to start.

Press the or button
(9).
 The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
 In the Zone AF mode, the selected
zone will be displayed.

an AF point.
2 Select
 You can select an AF point by shifting
horizontally with the <6> dial or
vertically with the <6> dial while
holding down the button. If
you press <0>, the center AF point
(or center zone) will be selected.
 In the Zone AF mode, turning the
<6> dial will change the zone in a
looping sequence.
 You can also select an AF point or
zone by shifting horizontally with the
keys or vertically with the
keys.

When you press the or button, the viewfinder displays the
following:
• 19-point automatic selection AF and Zone AF (manual selection of zone):
M AF
• 1 pt AF (Manual selection): SEL N (Center)/SEL AF (Off center)

AF Area Selection ModesK
h Single-point

AF (Manual Selection)
Select one AF point to be used for focusing.

q Zone AF (Manual Selection of Zone)
The 19 AF points are divided into five zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic selection of the
focusing point(s). It is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus the nearest subject, focusing a
specific target is harder than with single-point AF.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as .

AF Area Selection ModesK

r 19-point Automatic Selection AF
All the AF points are used to focus. This mode is set automatically in
Basic Zone modes (except ).
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are displayed,
it means they all have achieved focus.
With AI Servo AF, the manually-selected (p.106) AF
point is used first to achieve focus. The AF
point(s) achieving focus is displayed as .

AF Using Color Tone Detection
Configuring the following makes it easier to focus on still human subject.
• Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF.
• Set the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or
19-point automatic selection AF.
• Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], set [6: Auto AF point selection:
Color Tracking] to [0: One-Shot AF only] (if set to [1: Disable], basically
the nearest subject will be focused on) (p.341).
 When AI Servo AF mode is set with 19-point automatic selection AF or
Zone AF, the active AF point will keep switching to track the
subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the
subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject. Also, in low
temperatures, the tracking response is slower.
 If the camera cannot focus with the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite’s
AF-assist beam, set the AF area selection mode to Single-point AF
(manual selection) and select the center AF point to autofocus.
 When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in
red. This is a characteristic of AF point display using liquid crystal.
 In low temperatures, it may sometimes become difficult to see the AF
point display because of its characteristics using liquid crystal.

AF Area Selection ModesK

AF Operation and Maximum Lens Apertures
Maximum Lens Aperture: f/3.2 - f/5.6
With all AF points, cross-type AF sensitive to both vertical and
horizontal lines is possible. However, with the lenses below, the
peripheral AF points will detect only vertical or horizontal lines (no
cross-type focusing).
Lenses that Do Not Support Cross-Type Focusing with
Peripheral AF Points
Cross-type focusing
Vertical line-sensitive focusing
Horizontal line-sensitive focusing
Cross-type focusing at the < > and < > AF points is not possible with the
following lenses:
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6, EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II, EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III,
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM, EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6, EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
USM, EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II, EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

Maximum Lens Aperture: f/1.0 - f/2.8
Besides cross-type focusing (vertical and horizontal lines detected
simultaneously), the center AF point can also perform high-precision,
vertical-line sensitive AF.*
The remaining 18 AF points perform cross-type focusing, as with the
maximum aperture at f/3.2 - f/5.6.
* Except with the EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.

Subjects Difficult to Focus on
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
 Very low-contrast subjects
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)
 Subjects in very low light
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)
 Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)
 Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
 Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, do either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as
the subject and lock the focus before recomposing the shot
(p.69).
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to and focus manually.

 Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
 Conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View shooting
or movie shooting are listed on page 212.

Subjects Difficult to Focus on

MF: Manual Focus
the lens focus mode switch to
1 Set
.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Focus by turning the lens focusing
Focusing ring

ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.

If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point
that achieved focus and the focus indicator will light up in the
viewfinder.

i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided.

Press the button.
 [Drive mode] will appear.

the drive mode.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
the desired drive mode, then press
<0>.

u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
i : Continuous shooting (Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.)
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be
taken continuously.
B : Silent single shooting
Single shooting with less shooting sound than .
M : Silent continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)
Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than .
Q : Self-timer: 10sec./remote control
l : Self-timer: 2 sec.
q : Self-timer: Continuous
For self-timer shooting, see page 114. For remote control
shooting, see page 350.

i Selecting the Drive Mode

 If or is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is shot will be longer than with normal
single or continuous shooting.
 With Live View shooting, and cannot be set.
 When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed may
become slightly slower.
 In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
 i: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
is attained under the following conditions*: At 1/500 sec. or faster shutter
speed, at maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), Distortion
correction: Disable, and Anti-flicker shooting: Disable. The continuous
shooting speed may decrease depending on the shutter speed, aperture,
subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, remaining
battery level, etc.
* Set the AF operation mode to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer (IS) switch to
OFF when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.55.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, and EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.

j Using the Self-timer
the button.
1 Press
 [Drive mode] will appear.
the self-timer.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
the self-timer, then press <0>.
Q: 10-sec. self-timer
The remote controller can also
be used (p.350).
l: 2-sec. self-timer (p.75)
q: 10-sec. self-timer plus continuous shots
Press the keys to set
the number of multiple shots (2 to
10) to be taken with the self-timer.

the picture.
3 Take
 Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
 You can check the self-timer operation with
the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown
display (in seconds) on the LCD monitor.
 Two sec. before the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp will light up
and the beeper will sound faster.
 With , the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged
depending on the shooting functions settings such as the imagerecording quality or flash.
 If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter
button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.351). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.97) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
 When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.69) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
 To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either touch the LCD monitor or
press the button.

Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, white
balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction, lens
aberration correction, anti-flicker shooting, and other
functions.

 In Basic Zone modes, only the following can be set as
described in this chapter: Image-recording quality and lens
aberration correction.
 The J icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (p.30).

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten imagerecording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,
8a, b, c, 1+73, 1.

Select the image-recording
quality.
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
 [Image quality] will appear.

Pixels recorded (pixel count)
Possible shots

the image-recording quality.
2 Set
 The respective quality’s pixel count
and number of possible shots will be
displayed to help you select the
desired quality. Then press <0>.

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings
Image Quality
73
83

74 Medium
84 quality
7a
8a
b

10.6 (11M)
JPEG
5.9 (5.9M)

Pixels
Recorded
(megapixels)

(Approx.)
Possible
Shots

* The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting are
based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard
Picture Style) using an 8 GB card. These figures will vary by the subject,
card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and
other settings.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible 8 GB card based on
Canon’s testing standards.

Even if you use a UDMA card, the maximum burst indicator remains the
same. However, the maximum burst in parentheses in the above table will
be applied during continuous shooting.

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

FAQ
 I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper
size for printing.
Refer to the diagram on the left when
Paper size
choosing the image-recording quality. If
A2(59.4x42cm/23.4x16.5in.)
you want to crop the image, selecting a
73
higher quality (more pixels) such as 73,
A3(42x29.7cm/
83
1+73
83, 1+73, or 1 is recommended.
16.5x11.7in.)
74
1
b is suitable for playing back the image
84
7a
with a digital photo frame. c is suitable
8a
b
for emailing the image or using it on a
Web site.
A4(29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.)
12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.

 What’s the difference between 7 and 8?
These settings indicate the different levels of image quality caused
by different compression rates. The 7 setting produces a higher
image quality with the same number of pixels. Although 8 produces
a slightly lower image quality, this allows more images to be saved
on the card. Both b and c have 7 (Fine) quality.
 I was able to take more shots than the number of possible shots
indicated.
Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take
more shots than is indicated. It may also be fewer than indicated.
The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate.
 Does the camera display the maximum burst?
The maximum burst is displayed on the viewfinder’s right side. Since
it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 8 will
be displayed only as “9”. Note that this number will also be displayed
even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot
without a card in the camera.
 When should I use 1?
1 images must be processed on a computer. For details, see
“1” and “1+73” on the next page.

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

1
1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images.
1 images cannot be viewed on a computer without the use of EOS
software, such as Digital Photo Professional (p.404). However, you can
perform various adjustments on them that are impossible with other
image types such as 73. 1 is effective when you want to precisely
adjust the image yourself or shoot an important subject.

1+73
1+73 records a 1 image and a 73 image with a single shot. The
two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will be
saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension .JPG for
JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). 73 images can be viewed or printed even with
a computer which does not have the EOS software installed.

0001 . JPG
File number

RAW Image Processing Software
 The use of “Digital Photo Professional” (EOS software, p.404) is
recommended when viewing RAW images on a computer.
 Older versions of Digital Photo Professional may not be able to process
RAW images taken with this camera. If an older version of Digital Photo
Professional is installed on your computer, update (overwrite) it as follows.
• When the software CD-ROM (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk) is provided
with the camera:
 Install Digital Photo Professional from the CD-ROM.
• When the software CD-ROM (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk) is not
provided with the camera:
 Download a version of Digital Photo Professional compatible with this
camera from the Canon Web site.
 Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.

3Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioK
You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [3:2] is set by default. When
[4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] is set, lines will appear to indicate the shooting
range. During Live View shooting, the image appears with the
surrounding area masked in black.

Select the aspect ratio.
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Aspect
ratio], then press <0>.
 [Aspect ratio] will appear.

the aspect ratio.
2 Set
 Select an aspect ratio, then press
<0>.

 JPEG images
The images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.
 RAW images
The images will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. The
selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image file.
When you process the RAW image with the EOS software, this
allows you to generate an image with the same aspect ratio that was
set for shooting. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1] aspect
ratios, the lines to indicate the aspect ratio will appear during image
playback, but they are not actually drawn on the image.

3Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioK

The table below shows the aspect ratio and the number of recorded
pixels for each image-recording quality.
Image
Quality
3
1

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (approx.)
3:2

5328x4000*
6000x3368*
4000x4000
6000x4000
(24.0 megapixels) (21.3 megapixels) (20.2 megapixels) (16.0 megapixels)

3984x2656
3552x2664
(10.6 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels)

3984x2240*
(8.9 megapixels)

2656x2656
(7.1 megapixels)

2976x1984
(5.9 megapixels)

2656x1992
(5.3 megapixels)

2976x1680*
(5.0 megapixels)

1984x1984
(3.9 megapixels)

1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)

1696x1280*
(2.2 megapixels)

1920x1080
(2.1 megapixels)

1280x1280
(1.6 megapixels)

720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(0.35 megapixels) (0.31 megapixels) (0.29 megapixels) (0.23 megapixels)

 The asterisked image-recording quality settings do not match the
respective aspect ratio exactly.
 The shooting range displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly
larger than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD
monitor when shooting.
 If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.

g: Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the LightK
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set
automatically (p.124).

Press the button (9).

the ISO speed.
2 Set
 While looking in the viewfinder or at
the LCD monitor, press the
keys or turn the <6> dial to
select the desired ISO speed, then
press <0>.
 Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed
automatically (p.124).
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed

Shooting Situation
(No flash)

ISO 100 - ISO 400

Sunny outdoors
The higher the ISO
Overcast skies or evening time speed, the farther the
flash range will extend
ISO 1600 - ISO 12800, H
Dark indoors or night
(p.166).
ISO 400 - ISO 1600

* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.

Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:
On], “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) can also be selected (p.338).
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be
selected (p.339).
 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.

g: Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the LightK

 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
 When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
 As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,
noise (such as dots of light and banding) and irregular colors will be more
noticeable, and the resolution will be lower than usual.
 As the maximum ISO speed that can be set differs between still photo
shooting and movie shooting (manual exposure), the ISO speed you set
may change when you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting.
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to the original setting. The maximum ISO speed that can be set
varies depending on the setting for [2: ISO expansion] under [54:
Custom Functions (C.Fn)].
• When [0: Off] is set: If you set ISO 12800 during still photo shooting
and then switch to movie shooting, ISO speed will be changed to ISO
6400.
• When [1: On] is set: If you set ISO 12800 or “H” (equivalent to ISO
25600) during still photo shooting and then switch to movie shooting,
ISO speed will be changed to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800).

3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for [AUTO]K
For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400
- ISO 6400.
Under the [z3] tab, select [ISO Auto],
then press <0>. Select the ISO speed,
then press <0>.

g: Changing the ISO Speed to Suit the LightK

ISO [AUTO]
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the
actual ISO speed setting will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway. As indicated below, the
ISO speed will be set automatically to
suit the shooting mode.
Shooting Mode

ISO Speed Setting
No Flash

ISO 100 - ISO 6400

ISO 100 - ISO 1600

ISO 100 - ISO 6400

ISO 100 - ISO 12800

ISO 100 - ISO 6400*1

With bulb exposures

ISO 400*2
(Except in the A, C,
6, and F modes.)

*1: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set (p.123).
*2: (1) If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be
set.
(2) In the C, 2, 3, 4, 5, x, P, and modes, if you use bounce
flash with an external Speedlite, the ISO speed will be automatically set
within ISO 400 - ISO 1600 (or up to the maximum limit).

When [AUTO] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop increments.
However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments. Therefore, in the
image’s shooting information (p.306), you may find an ISO speed such as
ISO 125 or ISO 640 displayed as the ISO speed.

A Selecting a Picture StyleK
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically.

Press the button.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.

a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press
<0>.
 The Picture Style will be set.

You can also set the Picture Style with [z2: Picture Style].

Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tones will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene.
The colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery and
sunsets, and in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.

P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.

A Selecting a Picture StyleK

Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.128), you can adjust the skin
tone.
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
S Neutral
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images with
modest brightness and color saturation.
U Faithful
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at
a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the
subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images with modest
brightness and color saturation.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. If
you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the
[Monochrome] setting is canceled. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.

W User Def. 1-3
You can register a base style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.130). Any User
Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.

A Customizing a Picture StyleK
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 129.

Press the button.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.

a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press the
button.

a parameter.
3 Select
 Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.

the parameter.
4 Set
 Press the keys to adjust
the parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
 Press the button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
 Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.

 By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to its default.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, follow step 2 on page 125 to
select the adjusted Picture Style, then shoot.

A Customizing a Picture StyleK

Parameter Settings and Effects
g Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of the image.
To make it less sharp, set it toward the E end. The closer it is to E,
the softer the image will look.
To make it sharper, set it toward the F end. The closer it is to F, the
sharper the image will look.
h Contrast
Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.
To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is
to G, the more muted the image will look.
To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to
H, the crisper the image will look.
i Saturation
Adjusts the color saturation in the image.
To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the more diluted the colors will look.
To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The
closer it is to H, the bolder the colors will look.
j Color tone
Adjusts the color tone of skin.
To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the redder the skin tone will look.
To reduce skin redness, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to
H, the more yellow the skin tone will look.

A Customizing a Picture StyleK

V Monochrome Adjustment
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding
page.

kFilter Effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.

Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.

The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.

The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.

Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.

Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.

lToning Effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].

A Registering a Picture StyleK
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness and contrast.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.404).

Press the button.
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.

[User Def. *].
2 Select
 Select [User Def. *], then press
.
 The Detail setting screen will appear.

<0>.
3 Press
 With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.

the base Picture Style.
4 Select
 Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
 To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that is registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software),
select the Picture Style here.

A Registering a Picture StyleK

a parameter.
5 Select
 Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.

the parameter.
6 Set
 Press the keys to adjust
the parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” on pages 127-129.
 Press the button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
 The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].

 If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
 If you perform [Clear all camera settings] (p.267), Picture Styles and
their parameters set under [User Def. *] will be reverted to their default
settings. Picture Styles registered via EOS Utility (EOS software) will
have only their modified parameters reverted to their default settings.
 To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 125 to
select [User Def. *], then shoot.
 Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.406).

B: Matching the Light SourceK
The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in
the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the [Q] (Auto)
setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors
cannot be obtained with [Q], you can select the white balance to
match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

Press the button.
 [White balance] will appear.

a white balance setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)
displayed for the white balance
settings , , ,
or is the respective color
temperature.

O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.

Shoot a white object.
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
 Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
 You can use any white balance setting.

B: Matching the Light SourceK

[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
 The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.

the white balance data.
3 Import
 Select the image that was captured in
step 1, then press <0>.
 On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
 When the menu reappears, press the
button to exit the menu.

[O (Custom)].
4 Select
 Press the button.
 Select [O (Custom)], then press
<0>.

 If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
 In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured
while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome] (p.126), images
processed with a Creative filter, cropped images, and images taken with
another camera.
 Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
 The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (EOS software,
p.404) will be registered under [O]. If you perform step 3, the data for
the registered personal white balance will be erased.

u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceK
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.

White Balance Correction

Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
 The WB correction/WB bracketing
screen will appear.

the white balance correction.
2 Set
 Press the cross keys to move the

Sample setting: A2, G1

“ ” mark to the appropriate position.
 B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The
image’s color balance will be adjusted
towards the color in the direction of
the move.
 On the upper right, “Shift” indicates
the direction and correction amount,
respectively.
 Pressing the button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.

 When the white balance is corrected, will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
 One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)

u Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceK

White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be recorded
simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance
setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magenta/
green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB Bkt.). White
balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.

Set the white balance bracketing amount.

B/A bias ±3 levels

 In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <6>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
 On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction amount.
 Pressing the button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.

Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be
lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx. onethird the normal number.
 You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
 Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image on the card.
 During Live View shooting or movie shooting, the white balance icon will
blink.
 “Bkt” stands for bracketing.

3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastK
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.

Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.

the setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.

the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.

 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], [Auto Lighting Optimizer] will be set automatically to
[Disable].
 If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
 Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
In step 2, if you press the button and uncheck [X] the [Disable
during man expo] setting, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be set in
the mode.

3 Setting Noise ReductionK
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the
noise level.

Select [High ISO speed NR].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.

the level.
2 Set
 Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.

 [M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction]
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.

the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.

If you play back or directly print a 1+73 or 1 image with the camera,
the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. Check
the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software, p.404).

3 Setting Noise ReductionK

When [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is Set
 If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may be minimal.
 If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
 It takes some time to record images to the card since noise reduction is
applied and the images are merged after shooting. During the
processing of the images, “BUSY” will be displayed, and you cannot take
another picture until the processing is completed.
 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected. AEB and WB bracketing cannot be
used. [z3: Long exp. noise reduction] cannot be set. If any of these
has already been selected or set, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] cannot
be set.
 The [Distortion] setting will be set automatically to [Disable].
 Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted
according to the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)]’s [4: AF-assist beam
firing] setting.
 You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures.
 If you turn off the power, change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone
mode, shoot a bulb exposure, or shoot a movie, the setting will
automatically be changed to [Standard].
 [z3: Dust Delete Data] cannot be set.

Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.

Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.

3 Setting Noise ReductionK

the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.

 [Auto]
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
 [Enable]
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.

the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.

 With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. You
cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is
completed.
 Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
 With [Auto] and [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View
image displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction
process. The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. And image distortion due to lens
characteristics is called distortion. These lens aberrations and light falloff can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and Chromatic
aberration correction are set to [Enable], and Distortion correction is set
to [Disable].
If [Cannot correct - no data] is displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on page 142.

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Select [Lens aberration
correction].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.

the setting.
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.

the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
 The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction
amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.404).
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Chromatic Aberration Correction

Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.

the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.

Distortion Correction

Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Distortion], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.

the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
distortion corrected.

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

 When distortion correction is enabled, the camera records an image
range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (Image
periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution slightly lowered.)
 Distortion correction will be reflected in the captured image, but not in the
viewfinder or Live View image during shooting.
 If you set [Distortion] to [Enable], the continuous shooting speed will
decrease.
 Distortion correction cannot be set in the or mode, when
shooting a movie, or when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set.
 Dust Delete Data (p.272) will not be appended to images recorded with
distortion correction enabled.

Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination
correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction for
approx. 30 lenses. If you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination
correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will
be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is
registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check which lenses have their
correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual (p.406).
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Cautions for Lens Correction
 Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and
distortion correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
 When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
 If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be
reflected in the image displayed on the screen.
 The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have
distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
 If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
 Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.

3 Reducing FlickerK
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result.
With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light
source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker causes less
effect on exposure or color.

Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Antiflicker shoot.], then press <0>.

[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color
caused by the flicker.

 When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become slightly longer. Also, the
continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower, and the
shooting interval may become irregular.
 This function does not work with Live View shooting and movie shooting.
 In the or mode, if the shutter speed changes during
continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at
different shutter speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid
inconsistent color tones, use the or mode at a fixed shutter
speed.
 The color tone of images shot when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
 Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.

3 Reducing FlickerK

 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if you set [9: Mirror lockup] to
[1: Enable], the [Anti-flicker shoot.] setting will automatically switch to
[Disable].
 If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be detected.
 Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even when is displayed.
 Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
 If you recompose a shot, may appear and disappear
intermittently.
 Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result
may not be obtained even if you use this function.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 If is not displayed in the viewfinder, under [52: Viewfinder
display], set [Flicker detection] to [Show] (p.63). When the camera
reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, will light.
Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,
will not be displayed.
 If [Flicker detection] is set to [Show] and [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Disable], metering under a flickering light source will cause
to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [Enable] before shooting
is recommended.
 In Basic Zone modes, will not be displayed, but the effects of
flicker will be reduced when you shoot.
 Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.

3 Setting the Color Reproduction RangeK
The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.

Select [Color space].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.

the desired color space.
2 Set
 Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.

Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with computer software will therefore be
required.

 If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
 The ICC profile is not appended. Refer to explanations about the ICC
profile in the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (p.406).

In Creative Zone modes, you
can change various settings of
the camera as you desire to
obtain a wide variety of
shooting results, by selecting
the shutter speed and/or
aperture, adjusting the
exposure as you prefer, etc.

Advanced Operations

 The J icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes.
 After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder for
4 sec. (0) by the operation of metering timer.
 For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page 356.

c Main Dial Pointer
The pointer icon displayed
together with the shutter speed, aperture
setting, or exposure compensation
amount indicates that you can turn the
<6> dial to adjust the respective setting.

d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

Set the Mode Dial to .

on the subject.
2 Focus
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the focus
indicator on the viewfinder’s
bottom right will light up (when in
One-Shot AF mode).
 The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder.

the display.
3 Check
 A standard exposure will be obtained
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture display do not blink.

the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.

Shooting Tips
 Change the ISO speed. Use the built-in flash.
To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the
ISO speed (p.122) or use the built-in flash (p.166). In the
mode, the built-in flash will not fire automatically. Therefore, press
the (flash) button to raise the built-in flash when indoors or
shooting in low light.
 Change the program using Program shift.
After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to
change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination
(program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture
is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.

 If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO
speed or use flash.
 If the “4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO
speed.

Differences Between and (Scene Intelligent Auto)
In the mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.354).

s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement
You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the
(Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.
* stands for Time value.

Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen action
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

Set the Mode Dial to .

the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
 See “Shooting Tips” on the next page
for advice on setting the shutter
speed.
 Turning the <6> dial to the right
sets a faster shutter speed, and
turning it to the left sets a slower one.

the picture.
3 Take
 When you focus and press the
shutter button completely, the picture
will be taken at the selected shutter
speed.

Shutter Speed Display
The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However, the
viewfinder displays only the denominator. “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”
is 15 sec.

s: Conveying the Subject’s Movement

Shooting Tips
 To freeze the motion of a fast-moving subject
Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.
 To blur a running child or animal and convey an impression of
motion
Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow
the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter
button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady
to prevent camera shake.
 To blur a flowing river or fountain
Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to
prevent hand-held camera shake.
 Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not
blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed,
the aperture display will also change to maintain the
same exposure (amount of light reaching the image
sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture
range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that
the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (lowest
f/number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to
set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed.
If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest
f/number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to
set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.

D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set
aperture. The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.

f: Changing the Depth of Field
To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp,
set the Mode Dial to (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
* stands for Aperture value, which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens.

Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

Set the Mode Dial to .

the desired aperture.
2 Set
 The higher the f/number, the wider
the depth of field where sharper focus
is obtained in both the foreground
and background.
 Turning the <6> dial to the right will
set a higher f/number (smaller
aperture opening), and turning it to
the left will set a lower f/number
(larger aperture opening).

the picture.
3 Take
 Focus and press the shutter button
completely. The picture will be taken
with the selected aperture.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.

f: Changing the Depth of Field

Shooting Tips
 When using an aperture with a high f/number or shooting in low
light scenes, note that camera shake can occur.
A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower.
Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such
cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a
tripod.
 The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on
the lens and on the subject distance.
Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of
acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need
not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the
foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens
has a narrow depth of field.
And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther
subject will have a wider depth of field.
 Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed,
the shutter speed display will also change to
maintain the same exposure (amount of light
reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the
adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed
display will blink to indicate that the standard
exposure cannot be obtained.
If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed
display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set
a lower f/number or increase the ISO speed.
If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/4000 sec.) shutter
speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the
right to set a higher f/number or decrease the ISO speed.

f: Changing the Depth of Field

D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically to match the set aperture (autoflash exposure). The
shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to
suit the scene’s brightness.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the auto flash metering,
and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set
automatically. Both the subject and background look properly exposed
with a touch of atmosphere (automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you
are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.
Using a tripod is recommended.
To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set
[Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200
sec. (fixed)] (p.174).

Depth-of-Field PreviewK
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting, and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).

While looking at the Live View image (p.192) and holding down the depth-offield preview button, you can see how the range of acceptable focus will
change as you adjust the aperture.

a: Manual Exposure
You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired.
While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can
set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.
* stands for Manual.

Set the Mode Dial to .

2 Set the ISO speed (p.122).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6>
+ <6>
Standard exposure index

Exposure level mark

<6> dial.
 To set the aperture, hold down the
button and turn the <6> dial.

on the subject.
4 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be
displayed in the viewfinder.
 The exposure level mark indicates
how far the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level.

the exposure and take the picture.
5 Set
 Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter

speed and aperture.
 If the exposure level exceeds ±2 stops from the standard
exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator will display
or in the viewfinder. (On the LCD monitor, if the
exposure level exceeds ±3 stops, or will be displayed.)
If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed
and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore, you may not
obtain the desired exposure effect.
Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark for [Disable
during man expo] is removed, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set even
in the mode (p.136).

a: Manual Exposure

 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the button to lock the ISO speed.
 If you press the button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to
when the button was pressed.

I Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture.
The shutter speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec or bulb.

BULB: Bulb Exposures

Elapsed exposure time

A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open
for as long as you hold down the shutter
button. It can be used to shoot fireworks
and other subjects requiring long
exposures.
In step 3 on the preceding page, turn the
<6> dial to the left to set .
The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD monitor.

 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image may
look slightly grainy.
 You can reduce the noise due to long exposures by setting [z3: Long
exp. noise reduction] to [Auto] or [Enable] (p.138).
 For bulb exposures, using a tripod and a remote switch (sold separately,
p.351) is recommended.
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.350) for bulb
shooting. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
 You can turn off the elapsed exposure time display by pressing the
button.

q Changing the Metering ModeK
Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness
are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, metering mode is set automatically.

Select [Metering mode].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Metering
mode], then press <0>.

the metering mode.
2 Set
 Select the desired metering mode,
then press <0>.

q Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even
for backlit subjects. The camera sets the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.

w Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights
around the subject due to backlight, etc. The
gray area in the left figure is where the
brightness is metered to obtain the standard
exposure.

r Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the
subject or scene. The gray area in the left figure
is where the brightness is metered to obtain the
standard exposure. This metering mode is for
advanced users.

q Changing the Metering ModeK

e Center-weighted average metering
The brightness is metered at the image center
and then averaged for the entire scene. This
metering mode is for advanced users.

With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when you
press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w (Partial
metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted average metering)
modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the
shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)

Setting Exposure CompensationK
Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not
come out as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes
(except ). You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops
in 1/3-stop increments.

1
Increased exposure
for a brighter image

Check the exposure level indicator.
 Press the shutter button halfway
(0) and check the exposure level
indicator in the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor.

the compensation amount.
2 Set
 If the exposure is too dark, hold down
the button and turn the <6>
dial to the right (for increased exposure).
If the exposure is too bright, hold down
the button and turn the <6>
dial to the left (for decreased exposure).

Decreased exposure
for a darker image

the picture.
3 Take
 To cancel the exposure
compensation, set the exposure
compensation amount back to .

If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.136) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up
to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2
stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display or .
 If you want to set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops, setting it
with [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] (p.160) or with the Quick Control screen
(p.51) is recommended.

3 Auto Exposure BracketingK
This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the
exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with
three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure.
This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).

Standard exposure

Darker exposure
(Decreased exposure)

Brighter exposure
(Increased exposure)

Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
 Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press <0>.

the AEB range.
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB

range.
 Press the keys to set the
exposure compensation amount. If
AEB is combined with exposure
compensation, AEB will be applied
centering on level of exposure
compensation.
 Press <0> to set it.
 When you press the button
to exit the menu, the AEB range will
be displayed on the LCD monitor.

the picture.
3 Take
 Focus and press the shutter button
completely. The three bracketed
shots will be taken in this sequence:
standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.

3 Auto Exposure BracketingK

Canceling AEB
 Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB range display (set to 0).
 The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power
switch is set to <2>, flash recycling is completed, etc.

Shooting Tips
 Using AEB with continuous shooting
If the drive mode is set to or (p.112) and you press the
shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously in this sequence: standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure. The shooting will then stop
automatically.
 Using AEB with single shooting (u/B)
Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed
shots. The three bracketed shots will be taken in the following
sequence: standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
 Using AEB with the self-timer or a remote controller (sold
separately)
With the self-timer or a remote control shooting ( or ),
you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
With (p.114) set, the number of continuous shots will be three
times the number set.

 During AEB, in the viewfinder and AEB range will blink.
 AEB cannot be used with flash, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction], Creative
filters, or bulb exposures.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.136) is set to any setting other
than [Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced.

A Locking the ExposureK
You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from
the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at
the same exposure setting. Press the button to lock the exposure,
then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is
effective for backlit subjects, etc.

Focus on the subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be
displayed.

the button. (0)
2 Press
 The icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
 Each time you press the button,
the current autoexposure setting is
locked.

and take the picture.
3 Recompose
 If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.

AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.157)

AF Point Selection Method (p.106)
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
AE lock is applied at the
point that achieved focus.
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied to the center AF point.

* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to , AE lock is applied to the
center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeK
Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action is called “mirror
shock”. Mirror lockup can reduce the blur caused by camera vibrations.
This is useful especially when you are using a super telephoto lens or
shooting closeups (macro photography).
Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [9: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable]
in [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.342).

1 Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button
completely.

 The mirror will swing up.

2 Press the shutter button completely again.

 The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.
 After taking the picture, set [9: Mirror lockup] to [0: Disable].

Shooting Tips
 Using the self-timer , with mirror lockup
When you press the shutter button completely, the mirror locks up.
The picture will be then taken 10 sec. or 2 sec. later.
 Remote control shooting
Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken, remote
control shooting together with mirror lockup can further reduce
camera shake (p.350). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold
separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button to lock up
the mirror, and the picture will be taken 2 sec. after the mirror lockup.

Mirror Lockup to Reduce Camera ShakeK

 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
 If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror
lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay
time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the
self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no
picture will be taken.
 During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations,
etc. are disabled.
 If you use flash, the red-eye reduction lamp will not light up (p.167).
 Even if you set the drive mode to , , or , the camera
will still shoot in single shooting mode.
 When [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction], four continuous shots will be taken for the single picture
regardless of the [9: Mirror lockup] setting.
 If 30 sec. elapse after the mirror is locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the
mirror again.

Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with built-in flash
and external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately),
how to set flash settings with the camera’s menu
screen, and how to use the built-in flash for wireless
flash shooting.

 Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.
 AEB cannot be used with flash.

D Using the Built-in Flash
In indoor, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built-in
flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the
mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set
automatically to prevent camera shake.

Press the button.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can
press the button anytime to take
flash pictures.
 While the flash is recycling, “DbuSY”
is displayed in the viewfinder, and
[BUSYD] is displayed on the LCD
monitor.

the shutter button halfway.
2 Press
 In the bottom left of the viewfinder,
check that the icon is lit.

the picture.
3 Take
 When focus is achieved and you
press the shutter button completely,
the flash will fire for the picture.

(Approx. in meters/feet)

Effective Range of Built-in Flash
ISO Speed
(p.122)
ISO 100

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM, EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM,
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM
Wide Angle

1 - 3.4 / 3.3 - 11.2

1 - 3 / 3.3 - 9.8

1 - 2.1 / 3.3 - 6.9

1 - 6.9 / 3.3 - 22.6

1 - 6 / 3.3 - 19.7

1 - 4.3 / 3.3 - 14.1

1.7 - 13.7 / 5.6 - 44.9

1.5 - 12 / 4.9 - 39.4

1.1 - 8.6 / 3.6 - 28.2

3.4 - 27.4 / 11.2 - 89.9

3 - 24 / 9.8 - 78.7

2.1 - 17.1 / 6.9 - 56.1

* When a high ISO speed is set and focusing distance is long, appropriate
exposure may not be obtained depending on the subject conditions, etc.

D Using the Built-in Flash

Shooting Tips
 In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.
If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO
speed.
 Detach the lens hood. Do not get too close to the subject.
If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,
the bottom of the picture may look dark due to the obstructed flash.
For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make
sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).

3 Red-eye Reduction
Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can
reduce red eye.
Red-eye reduction will function in any shooting mode except <7>,
<3>, <5>, , or .
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Red-eye
reduc.], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 For flash photography, when you
press the shutter button halfway, the
red-eye reduction lamp will light up.
Then when you press the shutter
button completely, the picture will be
taken.
 The red-eye reduction feature is more effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are
close to the subject.
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the
scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will
shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture
after this scale display turns off.
 The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the
individual subject.

D Using the Built-in Flash

y Flash Exposure CompensationK
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject
does not come out as desired. You can set the exposure compensation
up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

Press the button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear
(p.51).

[y].
2 Select
 Press the cross keys to select
[y*].
 [Flash exposure comp.] will be
displayed at the bottom.

the exposure compensation
3 Set
amount.
 If the exposure is too dark, turn the
<6> dial to the right (for increased
exposure).
If the exposure is too bright, turn the
<6> dial to the left (for decreased
exposure).
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the icon will
appear in the viewfinder.
 After taking the picture, cancel the flash exposure
compensation by setting it back to 0.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.136) is set to any setting other
than [Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash
exposure compensation is set.
 If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold
separately, p.171), you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the
camera (Quick Control or External flash function settings). If it is set with both
the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.

D Using the Built-in Flash

 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash
settings] in [z1: Flash control] (p.176).

A Locking the Flash Exposure (FE lock)K
If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject may
turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc. Use FE
lock in such a case. After setting the proper flash exposure for the subject,
you can recompose (put the subject toward the side) and shoot. This
feature can also be used with a Canon EX-series Speedlite.
* FE stands for Flash Exposure.

Press the button.
 The built-in flash will be raised.
 Press the shutter button halfway and
look in the viewfinder to check that
the icon is lit.

2 Focus on the subject.
the button. (8)
3 Press
Aim the viewfinder center over the
subject where you want to lock the flash
exposure, then press the button.
 The flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
 In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed
for a moment and will light up.
 Each time you press the button, a preflash is fired and the
required flash output is calculated and retained in memory.

D Using the Built-in Flash

the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
 The flash is fired, and the picture is
taken.

 If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,
the icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.
 FE lock is not possible during Live View shooting.

D Using an External Speedlite
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.
When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the
camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other
words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the
built-in flash.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.

Shoe-mount Speedlites

 With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings
(p.173), only [Flash exp. comp] and [E-TTL II meter.] can be set for
[External flash func. setting]. ([Shutter sync.] can also be set with
certain EX-series Speedlites.)
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the
flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD
monitor will change from y to 0.

D Using an External Speedlite

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
 With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to (manual exposure) or
(aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
 When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.

Using Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at
1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a sync speed slower than
1/200 sec.
Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes
properly with the camera.

Cautions for Live View Shooting
A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.

 If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
 Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.

3 Setting the FlashK
With the built-in flash or an EX-series, external Speedlite compatible
with flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu to set flash
functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions.
If you use an external Speedlite, attach the Speedlite to the camera
and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For
details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Select [Flash control].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
 The Flash control screen will appear.

[Flash firing]
 Normally, set this to [Enable].
 If [Disable] is set, neither the builtin flash nor the external Speedlite
will fire. This is useful when you want
to use only the flash’s AF-assist
beam.

[E-TTL II meter.]
 For normal flash exposures, set this
to [Evaluative].
 [Average] is for advanced users. As
with an external Speedlite, the
metering area is averaged. Flash
exposure compensation may be
necessary.
Even if [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], if focus is difficult to achieve in low
light, the flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam, p.103).

3 Setting the FlashK

[Flash sync. speed in Av mode]
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.

 N: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
 V: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
 W: 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].

If [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the mode with the external Speedlite.

3 Setting the FlashK

Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly
When you use the built-in flash or an
external, EX-series Speedlite compatible
with flash function settings, you can
press the button to directly display
the [Built-in flash settings] or [External
flash func. setting] screen without first
displaying the menu screen.
 With built-in flash

Press the button twice.
 The built-in flash will be raised.
 Press the button again to display the
[Built-in flash settings] screen.
 With external Speedlite

Press the button.
 With the external Speedlite turned on,
press the button to display the
[External flash func. setting]
screen.

 When you press the button to display the flash function setting
screen, you cannot set [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], [Flash sync.
speed in Av mode], or [External flash C.Fn setting]. Set these
functions with [z1: Flash control] instead.
 If [Flash firing] is set to [Disable] and you press the button, the
[z1: Flash control] screen will appear.

3 Setting the FlashK

[Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. setting]
You can set the functions in the table below. The functions displayed under
[External flash func. setting] vary depending on the Speedlite model.
 Select [Built-in flash settings] or
[External flash func. setting].
 The flash function setting screen will
be displayed. With [Built-in flash
settings], only the highlighted
functions can be selected and set.
Sample screen

Wireless functions
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
FEB

[Built-in flash settings]

[External flash func. setting]

Flash exposure
compensation
Shutter
synchronization

Main Functions for [Built-in flash settings] and [External flash func. settings]
Function
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
FEB*
Wireless functions
Flash exposure
compensation
Flash ratio control
Master flash firing
Flash zoom*

[Built-in flash settings]
[External
Easy
Custom flash func.
Normal
Wireless Wireless
setting]
Firing
(p.182)
(p.185)
k
k
k

* For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Flash zoom], refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions.

3 Setting the FlashK

 Flash mode
When using an external Speedlite, you can select the flash mode to
suit your desired flash shooting.
 [E-TTL II] is the standard mode of
EX-series Speedlites for automatic
flash shooting.
 [Manual flash] is for advanced users
who want to set the [Flash output]
(1/1 to 1/128) themselves.
 Regarding other flash modes, refer to
the instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.

 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately
after the exposure starts.
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes.
When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail
of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.
With E-TTL II (auto flash exposure), two flashes will be fired: once when
you press the shutter button completely, and once immediately before
the exposure ends. Also, if the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, firstcurtain synchronization will be applied automatically.
If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also select [High-speed
synchronization] (e). For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
 Wireless functions
When performing optical transmission wireless flash shooting using
the master function of the built-in flash, see “Using Wireless Flash”
on page 179. When performing wireless flash shooting with radio or
optical transmission using the master function of the external
Speedlite, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
 Flash exposure compensation
See “Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 168.

3 Setting the FlashK

Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions
The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting]
vary depending on the Speedlite model.

Display the Custom Function.
 With the camera ready to shoot with
an external Speedlite, select
[External flash C.Fn setting], then
press <0>.

the Custom Function.
2 Set
 Press the keys to select the
function number, then set the function.
The procedure is the same as setting the
camera’s Custom Functions (p.336).
With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is
set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always fire at full output.

Clearing the Settings

Select [Clear settings].
 Under the [z1: Flash control] tab,
select [Clear settings], then press
<0>.

the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
 Select [Clear built-in flash set.],
[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press <0>.
 When you select [OK], the respective
flash settings will be cleared.
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with the
camera’s [Flash control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.

Using Wireless FlashK
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EXseries, external Speedlites having a wireless slave feature. It can
wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire via optical transmission.
Be sure to read the instructions and cautions about wireless flash
photography (optical transmission) in the Speedlite’s instruction
manual.

Slave Unit Settings and Position
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and
set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave
unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Speedlite
slave units can be used and controlled together.
(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.
(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel
as set on the camera.*1
(3) For flash ratio control (p.187), set the slave unit’s firing group.
(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown
below.
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2
Example of Wireless Flash Set-up

Approx. 10 m/32.8 ft.

Approx. 7 m/23.0 ft.

Approx. 5 m/
16.4 ft.

Approx. 7 m/
23.0 ft.

Using Wireless FlashK
*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, it
operates regardless of the channel set on the camera.
*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face
the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be
received by the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed lightemitting unit (flash head) and wireless sensor, take pictures while making sure it
can fire.

 Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s
button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test
firing (PILOT) button to cancel the auto power off.

The camera’s master function cannot be used for wireless flash shooting
with radio transmission.

Using Wireless FlashK

Wireless Flash Shooting Configurations
The tables below show the possible configurations for wireless flash
shooting. Choose the configuration suiting the subject, shooting
conditions, the number of external Speedlites you use, etc.
External Speedlite
A:B Flash
Quantity
Ratio

Built-in
Page
Flash

Setting
Wireless
Firing Group
Functions

Fully
Multiple
Automatic
(E-TTL II Multiple
autoflash) Multiple

• Flash exposure
compensation

• FE lock
External Speedlite

Built-in
Page
Flash

A:B Flash
Ratio

Single/
Multiple

Setting
Wireless
Firing Group
Functions
0

Single/
Multiple

Even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire in order
to control the slave unit via optical transmission. The flash fired to
control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending on the
shooting conditions.

Easy Wireless Flash ShootingK
The basics of easy, fully automatic wireless flash shooting are explained
below.

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all
wireless flash shooting. Therefore,
these steps are omitted in other
wireless flash setups explained on
the pages hereafter.

Press the button to raise the
built-in flash.
 For wireless flash shooting, be sure
to raise the built-in flash.

[Flash control].
2 Select
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.

[Evaluative].
3 Select
 For [E-TTL II meter.], select
[Evaluative], then press <0>.

Easy Wireless Flash ShootingK

[Built-in flash settings].
4 Select
 Select [Built-in flash settings], then
press <0>.

[EasyWireless].
5 Select
 For [Built-in flash], select
[EasyWireless], then press <0>.

[Channel].
6 Set
 Set the transmission channel (1-4) to
the same one as the slave unit.

the picture.
7 Take
 Set the camera and take the picture
in the same way as with normal
shooting.

the wireless flash shooting.
8 Exit
 For [Built-in flash], select
[NormalFiring].

 Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.
 Even though the firing of the built-in flash is disabled when
[EasyWireless] is set, it will still fire a small flash in order to control the
slave unit. Depending on shooting conditions, the flash fired to control
the slave unit may appear in the picture.
 Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.

Easy Wireless Flash ShootingK

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite.
This is convenient when you need a large flash output.

Basic settings:
Flash mode
E-TTL II meter.
Built-in flash
Channel

: E-TTL II
: Evaluative
: EasyWireless
: (Same as slave units)

All the slave units will fire at the same
output and be controlled to obtain a
standard exposure.
No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)
the slave units belong to, they will all fire
as one group.

Flash Exposure Compensation
If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash
exposure compensation to adjust the slave units’ flash output.
 Select [1exp. comp.], then press
<0>.
 If the flash exposure is too dark, press the
key to increase the flash exposure
and make it brighter. If the flash exposure is
too bright, press the key to decrease
the flash exposure and make it darker.

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and Built-in Flash
This is fully automatic wireless flash
shooting with one external Speedlite and
the built-in flash.
You can change the flash ratio between
the external Speedlite and built-in flash
to adjust how the shadows cast on the
subject.
On the menu screens, the <0> and
<1> icons indicate the external
Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>
icons indicate the built-in flash.

Select [CustWireless].
 Follow step 5 on page 183 to select
[CustWireless], then press <0>.

[Wireless func.].
2 Select
 For [Wireless func.], select [0:3],
then press <0>.

the desired flash ratio and
3 Set
take the picture.
 Select [0:3] and set the flash ratio
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio
to the right of 1:1 is not possible.
 If the built-in flash output is not enough,
set a higher ISO speed (p.122).
The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop increments).

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be fired as one flash unit, or
separated into slave groups for shooting with flash ratio control.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple
Speedlites.

Basic settings:
Flash mode
E-TTL II meter.
Wireless func.
Channel

: E-TTL II
: Evaluative
:0
: (Same as slave units)

[1All] Firing multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit
Convenient when you need a large flash
output. All the slave units will fire at the
same output and be controlled to obtain
a standard exposure.
No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)
the slave units belong to, they will all fire
as one group.

Set [Firing group] to [1All], then
take the picture.

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

[1 (A:B)] Firing multiple slave units in multiple groups

You can divide the slave units into
groups A and B, and change the flash
ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect.
Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction
manual and set one slave unit to firing
group A and the other to firing group B.
Position the Speedlites as shown in the
illustration.

Select [Wireless func.].
 Follow step 2 on page 185 to select
[0], then press <0>.

2 Set [Firing group] to [1 (A:B)].
the A:B flash ratio and shoot.
3 Set
 Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.

If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2stop increments).

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained
on pages 186-187.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.

Basic settings:
Flash mode
E-TTL II meter.
Wireless func.
Channel

: E-TTL II
: Evaluative
: [0+3]
: (Same as slave units)

[Firing group].
2 Select
 Select the firing group, then set the
flash ratio, flash exposure
compensation, and other necessary
settings before shooting.

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

Flash Exposure Compensation
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation
can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below)
which can be set vary depending on the [Wireless func.] and [Firing
group] settings.

[Flash exp. comp.]
 The set amount of flash exposure
compensation will be applied to the
built-in flash and all the external
Speedlites.

[2 exp. comp.]
 Flash exposure compensation is
applied only to the built-in flash.

[1 exp. comp.]
 The set amount of flash exposure
compensation will be applied to all
the external Speedlites.

FE Lock
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the button to
perform FE lock.

Custom Wireless Flash ShootingK

Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash Shooting
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set
manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([1 flash output],
[Group A output], etc.) vary depending on the [Wireless func.] setting
(see below).

[Wireless func.0]
 [Firing group: 1All]:
The manual flash output setting is
applied to all the external Speedlites.
 [Firing group: 1 (A:B)]:
You can set the flash output
separately for slave groups A and B.

[Wireless func.0+3]
 [Firing group: 1All and 2]:
The flash output can be set
separately for the external
Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.
 [Firing group: 1 (A:B)2]:
You can set the flash output
separately for slave groups A and B.
You can also set the flash output for
the built-in flash.

Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the picture on the camera’s
LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.

Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.404) installed on your computer,
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual (p.406).

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Display the Live View image.

 Press the button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor. In the mode,
the scene icon for the scene detected
by the camera is displayed on the
upper left (p.196).
 By default, Continuous AF (p.204) will take effect.
 The Live View image will closely reflect the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.

on the subject.
2 Focus
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.206).

the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture will be taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the button to exit the Live View shooting.
 The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with the image-recording
quality set to JPEG 73).
 During Live View shooting, pictures will be taken with One-Shot AF
(p.101) for all the shooting modes.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
 During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to the subsequent shots.
 You can also tap the subject on the LCD monitor to focus (p.206-213)
and shoot (p.214).
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.350) for Live
View shooting.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [A: Live View shoot.] to [Enable].

Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting (Approx. number of shots)
Temperature

Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)

 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17 and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, continuous Live View shooting is
possible for approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).
 In the mode, Live View shooting is not possible.
 In the and modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 When the flash is recycling, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD monitor,
and you cannot view the subject.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 218-219.
 When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to capture an image after you press
the shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
 If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.257). If
[52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
 With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately) or stereo AV cable AVCDC400ST (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a
TV set (p.298, 301).

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Information Display
 Each time you press the button, the information display will
change.
Battery check
Maximum burst*

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Histogram display
Auto Lighting Optimizer

Possible shots
Shooting mode

White balance/
White balance
correction

Drive mode
Metering mode

Image-recording
quality

Creative filters
Eye-Fi card
transmission
status

Switch to auto
selection
(AF point)

Exposure
simulation

AEB/FEB/Multi Shot
Noise Reduction

Flash-ready/Flash off
Shutter speed
Flash exposure compensation
Aperture

ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
GPS connection indicator

Digital compass
Exposure level indicator/AEB range

* The number will be displayed when the maximum burst decreases to nine or lower.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

 You can display the histogram by pressing the button. However,
the histogram is not displayed while pressing the shutter button
completely.
 When is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
 If is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of lowor bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the
actual image recorded.
 If the or shooting mode, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, flash, or
bulb exposure is used, the icon and histogram will be grayed out
(for your reference). The histogram may not be properly displayed in lowor bright-light conditions.

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems
or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Scene Icons
In the shooting mode, the camera will detect the scene type and
set everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type
is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or
shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject

Portrait*1
Movement

Non-Portrait
Background
Nature and
Color
Movement Close*2
Outdoor Scene

Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included

Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on
a tripod.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow
down.

Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation reflects the settings of the Picture Style,
white balance and other functions in the Live View image so you can
see what the captured image will look like.
During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the
function settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
 Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color
tone will be reflected.
 White balance
 White balance correction
 Light/scene-based shots
 Background blur (in mode)
* You can check the effect only during the setting procedure (when
[Simulating blur] is displayed).
 Color tone
 Metering mode
 Exposure
 Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
 Auto Lighting Optimizer
 Peripheral illumination correction
 Chromatic aberration correction
 Highlight tone priority
 Aspect ratio (shooting range confirmation)

Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here.

Q Quick Control
If you press the button when the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor in a Creative Zone mode, you can set the following: AF
method, Drive mode, Metering mode, Image-recording quality,
White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and Creative
filters.
In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions shown in the table on
page 89 (except background blur), as well as the functions in bold
above.

Press the button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.

a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select a
function.
 The settings of the function and
Feature guide (p.64) will appear.
 Press the keys to set the
function.
 In the <8> mode, select the
shooting mode box on the upper left
of the screen, then press <0> to
select the shooting mode.
 To set the drive mode’s
setting, WB correction/WB
bracketing, Picture Style parameters,
or Creative filter effects, press the
button.

Shooting Function Settings

the setting.
3 Exit
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to Live View shooting.
 You can also select [2] to return to
Live View shooting.

 In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the
button.
 With Live View shooting, you cannot set or for the drive
mode.
 When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a circle
indicating the metering area will be displayed on the center of the screen.

U Applying Creative Filters
While viewing the Live View image, you can apply a filter effect (Grainy
B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water painting effect,
Toy camera effect, or Miniature effect) for shooting. These are called
Creative filters.
When you take the picture, the camera saves only the image with the
Creative filter applied. If you also want to save the image without a
Creative filter applied, take the picture without a Creative filter. Then
apply a Creative filter effect and save it as a new image (p.312).

any shooting mode except
1 Set
, , or .
the button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[q].
3 Select
 Press the keys to select
[q] (Creative filter) on the right side
of the screen.

a filter.
4 Select
 Press the keys to select a
filter (p.202).
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.

U Applying Creative Filters

the filter effect.
5 Adjust
 Press the button (except for
Miniature effect).
 Press the keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
 For the Miniature effect, press <0>,
then press the keys to
move the white frame to where you
want the image to look sharp.

the picture.
6 Take
 The image is shot with the filter
applied.

Even if you set the drive mode to or , the camera will still shoot
in single shooting mode.
 You cannot shoot with Creative filters if the recording quality is 1+73
or 1, or if AEB, white balance bracketing, or Multi Shot Noise
Reduction is set.
 The histogram is not displayed when you shoot with Creative filters.
 With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look
different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.
 With the Soft focus and Miniature effects, the blurred effect displayed on
the LCD monitor will look different from the blurred effect recorded in the
picture. In Creative Zone modes, you can check the picture’s blurred
effect by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.
 Dust Delete Data (p.272) will not be appended to images shot with Fisheye effect applied.

U Applying Creative Filters

Creative Filter Characteristics
 V Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands
the center part of the image, the resolution at the center may
decrease depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the
image on the screen when setting this filter. The AF method will be
FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center).
 Y Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more
three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note
that the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered
with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant
noise.
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth
gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.

U Applying Creative Filters

 bToy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it
look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast
by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 5 on page 201, if you press the button (or tap
[T] on the lower right of the screen), you can switch between the
white frame’s vertical and horizontal orientations. The AF method
will be FlexiZone - Single to focus at the center of the white frame.

3 Menu Function Settings
The menu options displayed are as
follows.
The settable functions on this menu
screen apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not work with
viewfinder shooting (settings are
disabled).
 Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single]. See pages 206-213 for more about the AF method.
 Continuous AF
The default setting is [Enable].
The camera focuses the subject continuously to achieve rough
focus. This makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press the
shutter button halfway. If [Enable] is set, the lens will operate
constantly and consume more battery power. This will reduce the
number of possible shots due to shorter battery life.
If you want to set the lens focus mode switch to during
Continuous AF, first stop Live View shooting.
 Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take
the picture automatically. For details, see page 214.
 Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. You can
check horizontal or vertical tilt when shooting.

3 Menu Function Settings

 Metering timerK
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time). In Basic Zone modes, metering timer is fixed at 8 sec.

Selecting any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting. To
start Live View shooting again, press the button.
• [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear settings],
or [54: z firmware ver.]

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your
subject. The following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking],
[FlexiZone - Multi] (p.208), and [FlexiZone - Single] (p.210).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to
, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.216).

Select the AF method.
 Under the [A] tab, select [AF
method].
 Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
 While the Live View image is
displayed, you can also press the
button to select the AF method
on the Quick Control screen (p.198).

u(face)+Tracking:c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point
also moves to track the face.

Display the Live View image.
 Press the button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.

an AF point.
2 Select
 When a face is detected, the AF point
will appear over the face to be
focused on.
 If multiple faces are detected,
will be displayed. Use the
keys to move the frame over
the face you want to focus on.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select the face or subject. If
the subject is not a face, will be
displayed.
 If no faces can be detected, or if you
tap on the LCD monitor but do not
select any face or subject, the
camera will switch to [FlexiZone Multi] with automatic selection
(p.208).

on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.

the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.192).

 If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to and
focus manually.
 An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
 Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
 The
may cover only a part of the face.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

 If you press <0> or the button, the AF point will appear at
the center and you can use the cross keys to move the AF point.
 Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the
picture, the
will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button
halfway, the subject will be focused on, in FlexiZone - Multi method with
automatic selection.

FlexiZone - Multi:o
You can use up to 49 AF points for wide-area focusing (automatic
selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing
(zone selection).

Display the Live View image.
 Press the button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.

the AF point.J
2 Select
 Pressing <0> or the button will
toggle between automatic selection
and zone selection. In Basic Zone
modes, automatic selection is set
automatically.
 Use the cross keys to select a
zone. To return to the center zone,
press <0> or the button again.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select a zone. When a zone
is selected, tap [n] on the screen
to switch to automatic selection.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the area
frame will turn orange.

the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.192).

 If the camera does not focus on the desired target subject with automatic
AF point selection, select a zone or switch the AF method to [FlexiZone
- Single] and refocus.
 The number of AF points varies, depending on the [A3: Aspect ratio]
setting. At [3:2], [4:3], and [16:9], there are 49 AF points. At [1:1], 35 AF
points.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.

the Live View image.
1 Display
 Press the button.

 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The AF point < > will appear.
 During movie shooting, if [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.

the AF point.
2 Move
 Press the cross keys to move the
AF point to where you want to focus. (It
cannot go to the edge of the screen.)
 Pressing <0> or the button will
return the AF point to the screen’s
center.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.

on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will
turn green and the beeper will sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.

the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.192).

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

Notes for AF
AF Operation
 Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
 You cannot focus on a moving subject continuously.
 The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
 Depending on the subject or shooting conditions, etc., focusing may
take longer or the continuous shooting speed may become slower.
 If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and execute AF under the actual light
source.
 If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.
 When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the button (or
tap on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image
center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the
shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the
camera will focus.
 When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the button (or
tap on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be
magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus in the magnified
view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a tripod and
you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is difficult in
magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF. Note that
the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views.
 If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, precise focus may not be
achieved.

When in magnified view, Continuous AF (p.204) will not be executed.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
 Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces
or when highlight or shadow details are lost.
 Subjects in low light.
 Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
 Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
 Fine lines and subject outlines.
 Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
 Night scenes or points of light.
 The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
 Extremely small subjects.
 Subjects at the edge of the picture.
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.).
 The AF point covers both near and distant subjects (Example:
Animal in a cage, etc.).
 Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
 A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
 Autofocusing while the subject is very far out of focus.
 Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
 A special effect filter is used.
 Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

 If focus is not achieved with the shooting conditions on the preceding
page, set the lens focus mode switch to and focus manually.
 If you use AF with any of the following lenses, focusing may take longer
or correct focus may not be achieved.
EF50mm f/1.4 USM, EF50mm f/1.8 II, EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro,
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
For information on discontinued lenses, refer to the Canon Web site.
 If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is out of focus, aim the center AF
point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again and then take the
picture.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
 In magnified view, focusing may be difficult due to camera shake. Using
a tripod is recommended.

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.

Display the Live View image.
 Press the button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.

the touch shutter.
2 Enable
 Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
 [x] (Touch shutter: Enable)
You can tap on the spot to focus and
shoot.
 [y] (Touch shutter: Disable)
You can tap on the spot to select where
you want to focus. Press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.

on the screen to shoot.
3 Tap
 Tap on the face or subject on the
screen.
 On the point you tap, the camera will
focus in the AF method that was set
(p.206-210). When [FlexiZone Multi] is set, it will switch to
[FlexiZone - Single].
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
turns green and the picture is taken
automatically.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot
be taken. Tap on the face or subject
on the screen again.

x Shooting with the Touch Shutter

 Even if you set the drive mode to , the camera will still shoot in
single shooting mode.
 The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view.
 If the Fish-eye effect Creative filter is set, the camera will focus using the
AF point on the center of the screen regardless of the point you tap on.
 If the Miniature effect Creative filter is set, the touch shutter does not
work.
 When [10: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [1: AE lock/AF] or [3: AE/
AF, no AE lock] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], autofocusing
does not take effect.
 You can also set the touch shutter with [A: Touch shutter].
 To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on the
screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the
exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the
screen.

MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.

Set the lens focus mode switch to
.
 Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.

the magnifying frame.
2 Display
 Press the button.
 The magnifying frame will appear.
 You can also tap [s] on the screen to
magnify the image.

the magnifying frame.
3 Move
 Press the cross keys to move

Magnifying frame

the magnifying frame to the position
where you want to focus.
 To return to the screen’s center, press
<0> or the button.

the image.
4 Magnify
 Each time you press the button,
the magnification of the image will
change in the following sequence:
1x 9 5x 9 10x 9 Normal view
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification

MF: Focusing Manually

manually.
5 Focus
 While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
 After achieving focus, press the
button to return to the normal view.

the picture.
6 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button to take the
picture (p.192).

General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality

 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
 If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
 If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White and Red Internal Temperature Warning Icons

 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white or red
icon will appear.
 The white icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
 The red icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the or icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, always turn off the camera.
 If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white icon is displayed.
Shooting Results

 If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out
as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. In
magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
orange. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be
captured in the normal view range.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.136) is set to any setting other
than [Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation is set.
 If you use a TS-E lens (except the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L
II) and shift or tilt the lens or use an Extension Tube, the standard
exposure may not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result.

General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image

 Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
 Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View
image is different from that of the recorded image.)
 If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume shooting
under the actual light source.
 If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
 In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
 When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
 If the shutter speed is 1 sec. or slower, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD
monitor, and the Live View display will not appear until the exposure is
completed.
Custom Functions

 During Live View shooting, some Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.337).
Lens and Flash

 The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode,
available since the second half of 2011.
 FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling
flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.

Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the power switch to
. The movie recording
format will be MP4.

 For cards that can record movies, see page 5.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended.
 To shoot while handholding the camera, see page 70.

Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).

k Shooting Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to play back the
movies shot (p.298-301).

Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to any mode other than ,
autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness.

Set the power switch to .
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.

any shooting mode except
2 Set
.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.206-213, 216).
 By default, [Movie Servo AF:
Enable] is set so that the camera will
always focus. To stop Movie Servo
AF, see page 248.

the movie.
4 Shoot
 Press the button to start

Recording movie

Built-in microphones

shooting a movie. To stop movie
shooting, press again.
 While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
 Sound will be recorded by the built-in
microphones.

k Shooting Movies

 General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 253-254.
 If necessary, also read the General Live View Shooting Cautions on
pages 218-219.
 In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as with .
Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed
on the upper left (p.224).
 In the and shooting modes, movies will be taken with the
same settings as in the mode.
 Settable menu functions differ between Basic Zone modes and Creative
Zone modes (p.358).
 Shutter speed and aperture are set automatically.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can press the button (p.162) to lock
the exposure (AE lock). The exposure setting will be displayed for the
number of seconds set with [Z1: Metering timer]. After applying AE
lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the
button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the button.)
 In Creative Zone modes, you can hold down the button and turn
the <6> dial to set the exposure compensation.
 Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and ISO
speed on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a
still photo (p.227). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not
displayed. Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ
from that for still photo shooting.
 If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the shutter speed and aperture
will not be recorded in the image information (Exif).

ISO Speed in Basic Zone Modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.

ISO Speed in , , and Modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set
to [1: On], the maximum speed will be expanded to H (equivalent to
ISO 12800).
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400.

k Shooting Movies

Scene Icons
During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed and the shooting will be
adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Background

Non-Portrait
Nature and
Outdoor Scene

Background
Color

Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset

Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.

Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately)
Equipped with an LED Light
With autoexposure (modes other than a) movie shooting, the camera
will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under low-light
conditions. For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

k Shooting Movies

Manual Exposure Shooting
In the mode, you can freely set the shutter speed, aperture, and
ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies
is for advanced users.

Set the power switch to .
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.

2 Set the Mode Dial to .
the ISO speed.
3 Set
 Press the button and press
the keys or turn the <6>
dial to select the ISO speed.
 For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.

the shutter speed and
4 Set
aperture.
<6>
+ <6>

 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter
speeds vary depending on the frame
rate <9>.
• D C B:
1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
• F E: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
 To set the aperture, hold down the
button and turn the <6>
dial.

k Shooting Movies

and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.222).

ISO Speed During Manual Exposure Shooting
 With [AUTO], the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100
- ISO 6400.
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in
whole-stop increments. Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if
[2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On], the manual setting range will
expand so you can also select H (equivalent to ISO 12800).
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the ISO speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400.
 Since shooting a movie at ISO 12800 may result in much noise, it is
designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).
 If ISO speed is set to H (ISO 25600) when [2: ISO expansion] is set to
[1: On] under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)] and you switch from still
photo shooting to movie shooting, the ISO speed will be H (equivalent to
ISO 12800). When you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed
will be ISO 12800.
 Exposure compensation cannot be set.
 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.227)
compared to when the button was pressed.
 By pressing the button, you can display the histogram.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.

k Shooting Movies

Information Display
 Each time you press the button, the information display will
change.
AF method
• c : u+Tracking
• o : FlexiZone - Multi
• d : FlexiZone - Single

Movie shooting mode
y : Autoexposure
(Basic Zone
modes)
k : Autoexposure
(Creative Zone
modes)
z : Manual exposure

Possible shots
Movie shooting remaining time* / Elapsed time
Battery check
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Histogram (with manual exposure)

Image-recording
quality
Movie recording
size
Frame rate

White balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Exposure mode
L : Autoexposure
K : Manual
exposure

Video snapshots
LED light
Movie Servo AF
AE lock

Miniature effect movie

Aperture
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Digital compass
GPS connection indicator
Exposure level indicator

Recording level: Manual
ISO speed
Attenuator
Highlight tone priority
Wind filter: Disable

Applies to a single movie clip.
 The grid lines or histogram cannot be displayed during movie shooting.
(The display will disappear when you start shooting a movie.)
 When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.

k Shooting Movies

Cautions for Movie Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
shooting, the white balance may also change.
 If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may
flicker.
 Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming
the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the
lens’s maximum aperture changes or not. Exposure changes may be
recorded as a result.
 You cannot magnify the image during movie shooting.
 Be careful not to cover the built-in microphones (p.222) with your finger,
etc.
 General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 253-254.
 If necessary, also read the General Live View Shooting Cautions on
pages 218-219.

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems
or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

k Shooting Movies

 Movie-related settings are under the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs (p.248).
 A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent 4 GB.
 The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to [A]).
 Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphones (p.222).
 Most external microphones (commercially available) equipped with a 3.5
mm diameter mini plug can be used.
 You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.350) to start and
stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is . Set the shooting timing
switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit button. If the switch is
set to (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take effect.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, the total movie shooting time
will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
and approx. 1 hr. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F).
 The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available
since the second half of 2011.

Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for
the Picture Style, white balance, etc., on the image.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
 Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be reflected.











White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Miniature effect movie

k Shooting Movies

Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.

Taking Still Photos during Movie Shooting

 If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
 The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed.
 The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.
 Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.
Function

As set in [z1: Image quality].
ImageWhen the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the
Recording
aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect
Quality
ratio will be 4:3.
ISO
Speed*

• With autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within ISO 100 ISO 6400.
• With manual exposure shooting: See “ISO Speed During Manualexposure Shooting” on page 226.

Exposure
Setting

• With autoexposure shooting: Automatically-set shutter speed and
aperture (displayed when pressing the shutter button halfway).
• With manual exposure shooting: Manually-set shutter speed and
aperture.

* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
 Regardless of the drive mode setting, single shooting will take effect for
still photo shooting during movie shooting.
 The self-timer can be set before you start shooting a movie. During
movie shooting, the camera will switch to single shooting.

k Shooting Movies

When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie
shooting, the following phenomena may occur.
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens operation noise.
• You cannot shoot still photos when focus is not achieved, such as when
the subject is moving.

Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here.

Q Quick Control
If you press the button while the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor, you can set any of the following: AF method, Drive mode,
Image-recording quality (still photos), Movie recording size, Video
snapshots, White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and
Miniature effect movie.
In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold can be set.

Press the button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.

a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select a
function.
 The selected function and Feature
guide (p.64) will appear.
 Press the keys to set the
function.
 To set the drive mode’s , WB
correction/WB bracketing, or Picture
Style parameters, press the
button.

the setting.
3 Exit
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to movie shooting.
 You can also select <2> to return to
movie shooting.

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
With [Z2: Movie rec. size], you can
set the movie recording size (image size,
frame rate, and compression method)
and other functions.

 Image Size
L 1920x1080
Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
w 1280x720
High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
x 640x480
Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.
 Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
D 29.97 fps/F 59.94 fps
For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
C 25.00 fps/E 50.00 fps
For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
B 23.98 fps
Mainly for motion pictures.

The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen switches
depending on whether [53: Video system] is set to [NTSC] or [PAL].
B (23.98 fps) can be selected only when [NTSC] is set.

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

 Compression Method
Standard
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.
Light (v)
The movie is recorded at a low bit rate for playback on various
devices, resulting in a smaller file size than with [Standard].
Therefore, you can shoot longer than with [Standard].

If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording size
again.

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
Movie Recording Size
DC
L
Standard
B
[1920x
1080] DC
Light

Total Recording Time on Card
4 GB

(Approx.)
File Size

1 hr. 10 min. 216 MB/min.

1 hr. 26 min. 2 hr. 53 min. 87 MB/min.

w
20 min.
40 min.
1 hr. 21 min. 187 MB/min.
FE Standard
[1280x
Light
2 hr. 5 min. 4 hr. 10 min. 8 hr. 20 min. 30 MB/min.
720] DC
x
[640x
480]

1 hr. 55 min. 3 hr. 50 min. 66 MB/min.

2 hr. 43 min. 5 hr. 26 min. 10 hr. 53 min. 23 MB/min.

 Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches the
4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time displayed in the movie
shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting until the movie
file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically
and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie to be played back.
 Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)

An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table above
(p.253).

Shooting Miniature Effect Movies
You can shoot movies having a Miniature (diorama) effect. Select the
playback speed and shoot.

Press the button.
 The Quick Control screen will appear.

[T].
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
[T] (Miniature effect movie) on the
right of the screen.

the playback speed.
3 Select
 Press the keys to select
[5x], [10x], or [20x], then press <0>.

the white frame over the
4 Position
part you want to look sharp.
 Press the keys to move the
white frame over the part you want to
look sharp.
 To switch the white frame’s vertical /
horizontal orientation, press the
button (or tap [T] on the screen’s
lower right).

Shooting Miniature Effect Movies

the movie.
5 Shoot
 The AF method will be FlexiZone Single to focus on the center of the
white frame.
 The white frame is not displayed
while you shoot.
Playback Speed and Length (for 1-minute movie)
Speed
O (5x)

Playback Length
Approx. 12 sec.

 Sound will not be recorded.
 With Miniature effect movies, Movie Servo AF will not work.
 Miniature effect movie cannot be set if video snapshot, 1+73, 1,
or white balance bracketing is set.
 You cannot take still photos while shooting a Miniature effect movie.
 Miniature effect movies whose playback time is shorter than 1 sec.
cannot be edited (p.292).

3 Shooting Video Snapshots
You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4
sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be
joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You
can thereby show quick highlights of a trip or event.
A video snapshot album can also be played back together with
background music (p.245, 297).
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video
snapshot 1

Video
snapshot 2

Video
snapshot x

Video snapshot album

Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration

Select [Video snapshot].
 Under the [Z2] tab, select [Video
snapshot], then press <0>.

[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

[Album settings].
3 Select
 Select [Album settings], then press
<0>.

[Create a new album].
4 Select
 Select [Create a new album], then
press <0>.

the snapshot length.
5 Select
 Press <0> and use the
keys to select the snapshot’s length,
then press <0>.

[OK].
6 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.

Shooting duration

 Press the button to exit the
menu.
 A blue bar will appear to indicate the
snapshot length.
 Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.240).

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Creating a Video Snapshot Album
the first video snapshot.
7 Shoot
 Press the button, then shoot.
 The blue bar indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
 The confirmation screen will appear
(p.241-242).

as a video snapshot album.
8 Save
 Select [J Save as album], then
press <0>.
 The movie clip will be saved as the
video snapshot album’s first video
snapshot.

to shoot more video
9 Continue
snapshots.
 Repeat step 7 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
 Select [J Add to album], then press
<0>.
 To create another video snapshot
album, select [W Save as a new
album].
 Repeat step 9 as necessary.

the video snapshot shooting.
10 Exit
 Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
 Press the button to exit the
menu, and return to the normal movie
shooting.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Options in Steps 8 and 9
Function

J Save as album
(Step 8)

The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.

J Add to album
(Step 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be
added to the album recorded immediately
before.

W Save as a new album
(Step 9)

A new video snapshot album is created
and the movie clip is saved as the first
video snapshot. The new album will be a
different file from the previously recorded
album.

1 Playback video snapshot
(Steps 8 and 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be
played back. For playback operations,
see the table on the next page.

r Do not save to album
(Step 8)
r Delete without saving to album
(Step 9)

The video snapshot just recorded will be
erased instead of being saved to the
album. Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.

If you want to shoot another video snapshot
right after shooting one video snapshot, set
[Show confirm msg] to [Disable]. This
setting will allow you to immediately shoot the
next video snapshot without the confirmation
screen appearing after you shoot each time.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

[Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 8 and 9
Function

Playback Description

By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video
snapshot recorded immediately before.

Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.

P Skip backward*

Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back
by a few seconds.

time you press <0>, the previous frame is
3 Previous frame Each
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.

O Skip forward*

Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
forward by a few seconds.

Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Playback position

Playback time (minutes:seconds)

You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.290) volume by
turning the <6> dial.

Pressing the button returns to the previous
screen.

* With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping length corresponds to
the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8
sec.).

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Adding to an Existing Album

Select [Add to existing album].
 Follow step 4 on page 239 to select
[Add to existing album], then press
<0>.

an existing album.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
an existing album, then press <0>.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 Certain video snapshot settings will
change to match the existing album’s
settings.
 Press the button to exit the
menu.
 The video snapshot shooting screen
will appear.

the video snapshot.
3 Shoot
 See “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.240) to shoot the video
snapshot.

You cannot select an album shot with another camera.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots
 You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration
(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).
 Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size].
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto]/[Manual] to [Disable]
or from [Disable] to [Auto]/[Manual].
• Updating the firmware.
 You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot.
 The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.
Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during
playback may not be exact.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Playing back an Album
You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal
movie (p.290).

Play back the movie.
 Press the button to display an
image.

the album.
2 Select
 In the single-image display, the
[st] icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a video
snapshot album.
 Press the keys to select
an album.

back the album.
3 Play
 Press <0>.
 On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [7] (Play), then
press <0>.

Background Music
 You can play background music when you play back albums, normal
movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.291, 294). To play
background music, you must first copy the background music to the card
using EOS Utility (EOS software). For information on how to copy the
background music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.406).
 Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

Editing an Album
After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video
snapshots in the album.

Select [X].
 On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [X] (Edit), then
press <0>.
 The editing screen will be displayed.

an editing operation.
2 Select
 Select an editing option, then press
<0>.

T Move snapshot

Press the keys to select the video snapshot
you want to move, then press <0>. Press the
keys to move the snapshot, then press <0>.

L Delete snapshot

Press the keys to select the video snapshot
you want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will
be displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing
<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will
disappear.

7 Play snapshot

Press the keys to select the video snapshot
you want to play, then press <0>.

3 Shooting Video Snapshots

the edited album.
3 Save
 Press the button to return to
the Editing panel at the screen’s
bottom.
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new album, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original album, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.

 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.

3 Menu Function Settings
Z1
When you set the power switch to ,
the [Z1] and [Z2] tabs will show
functions dedicated to movie shooting.

 AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 206-213. You
can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single].
 Movie Servo AF
During movie shooting, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
 The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
 Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery
power and shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.235).
 With certain lenses, the lens operation noise during focusing may
be recorded. If this happens, use an external microphone
(commercially available) to reduce lens operation noise in the
movie. Also, using certain STM lenses (for example, the EF-S1855mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM) will reduce lens operation noise.
 If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to during
Movie Servo AF, first set the power switch to <1>.

3 Menu Function Settings

 If you want to keep the focus at a specific point, or if you do not

want the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can temporarily
stop Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop Movie Servo AF,
the AF point will turn gray. When you perform the same steps
below, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• Press the button.
• Tap the [P] icon on the lower left of the screen.
• If [10: Shutter/AE lock button] is set to [2: AF/AF lock, no AE
lock] in the [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], you can pause the
Movie Servo AF while holding down the button. When you
let go of the button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
 When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after pressing the or button, Movie Servo AF will
resume.
When [Disable] is set:
 Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
 Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
212.
 Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or in magnified view.
 During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).

3 Menu Function Settings

 AF with shutter button during movie recording
While shooting a movie, you can also take a still photo by pressing
the shutter button completely. By default, AF operation is set to
[One-Shot AF].
When [One-Shot AF] is set:
• You can refocus and shoot a still photo by pressing the shutter
button halfway while shooting a movie.
• When shooting a still subject, you can perform shooting in
precise focus.
When [Disable] is set:
• You can immediately start shooting a still photo by pressing the
shutter button, even though focus is not achieved. This is
effective when you want to give priority to the shooting
opportunity rather than to focusing.
 Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines. You can
check horizontal or vertical tilt when shooting.
 Metering timerK
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).

 Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size, frame rate, and
compression method). For details, see pages 233-235.

3 Menu Function Settings

 Sound recording J

Normally, the built-in microphones will
record stereo sound. If a commerciallyavailable external stereo microphone
equipped with a mini plug (3.5 mm
diameter) is connected to the camera’s
external microphone IN terminal (p.26), it
will be given priority.

[Sound rec./Rec. level] options
[Auto]
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.
Auto level control will operate automatically in
response to the sound level.
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the soundrecording level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while
pressing the keys to adjust the soundrecording level. Look at the peak hold indicator
(approx. 3 sec.), and adjust so that the level meter
sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB)
mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the
sound will be distorted.
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.
[Wind filter]
When set to [Auto], it reduces wind noise when there is wind
outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the built-in
microphones. When the wind filter function takes effect, low bass
sounds will also be reduced.
[Attenuator]
Even if you set [Sound recording] to [Auto] or [Manual] before
shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud
sound. In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.

3 Menu Function Settings

 In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [Sound recording] will
be [On] or [Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted
automatically (same as with [Auto]), and the wind filter function will take
effect.
 The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
 Both L and R record audio at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.

 Video snapshots
You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 238.

General Movie Shooting Cautions
White and Red Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white or red
icon will appear.
 The white icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you stop still photo shooting for a
while and allow the camera to cool down. Since movie image quality will
hardly be affected, you can still shoot movies.
 The red icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
 Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the or icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting,
always turn off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer
(IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you
do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes
battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease
the number of possible shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is
not necessary, it is recommended to set the IS switch to <2>.
 The camera’s built-in microphones will also pick up camera operation
noise. Use an external microphone (commercially available) to reduce
camera operation noise in the movie.
 Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
 If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, the movie
may freeze temporarily. In such cases, shoot movies with manual
exposure.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MP4 format).

General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie
shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
will stop automatically.
Indicator
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting
 Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
218.
Playback and TV Connection
 If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.298-301) and shoot a movie,
the TV set will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the
sound will be properly recorded.

Restrictions on MP4-format Movies
Note that generally the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.
 Sound will not be recorded on approx. the last two frames.
 When you play back movies on Windows, images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.

Handy Features

















Disabling the Beeper (p.256)
Card Reminder (p.256)
Setting the Image Review Time (p.257)
Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.257)
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.258)
Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.259)
File Numbering Methods (p.261)
Setting Copyright Information (p.263)
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.265)
Checking Camera Settings (p.266)
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.267)
LCD Monitor Off/On Setting (p.270)
Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.270)
Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.271)
Appending Dust Delete Data (p.272)
Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.274)

Handy Features
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved
during self-timer shooting and touch screen operations.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep], then
press <0>. Select [Disable], then press
<0>.
To silence the beeper only during touch
screen operations, select [Touch to y].

3 Card Reminder
This setting prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Release
shutter without card], then press <0>.
Select [Disable], then press <0>.
If there is no card inserted in the camera
and you press the shutter button, “Card”
will be displayed in the viewfinder, and
you cannot release the shutter.

3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just
after shooting. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed just after
shooting. If [Hold] is set, the image review will be displayed up until the
[Auto power off] time has elapsed.
During image review, if you operate any camera controls such as
pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.
Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>. Select the
desired setting, then press <0>.

3 Setting the Auto Power-off Time
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after the set
time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time.
When the camera is turned off due to auto power off, you can turn it on
again by pressing the shutter button, etc.
If [Disable] is set, either turn off the camera or press the
button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power.
Even when [Disable] is set, if the camera is not used for 30 min.,
the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD
monitor again, press the button.
Under the [52] tab, select [Auto power
off], then press <0>. Select the desired
setting, then press <0>.

3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to
read.
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>. Press the
keys to adjust the brightness
on the adjustment screen, then press
<0>.
When checking the exposure of an
image, set the LCD monitor brightness to
4 and prevent the ambient light from
affecting the image.

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.

Creating a Folder

Select [Select folder].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.

[Create folder].
2 Select
 Select [Create folder], then press
<0>.

a new folder.
3 Create
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.

Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder

 With the folder selection screen
displayed, select a folder and press
<0>.
 The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
 Subsequent captured images will be
recorded into the selected folder.

Folder name
Highest file number

Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.262) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.

Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the last
five characters in each name are different.

3 File Numbering Methods
The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the
images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file
number is assigned.
The file number will appear on your computer in this format:
IMG_0001.JPG.
Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>. The
available settings are described below.
Select the option, then press <0>.

 [Continuous]: The file numbering continues in sequence even
after you replace the card or create a folder.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient
when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001
to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on
your computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card
or in the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is
recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1

File numbering after
creating a folder

Next sequential file number

 [Auto reset]: The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time
the card is replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering
restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is convenient if
you want to organize images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may
continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card
or in the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering
starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1

File numbering after
creating a folder

File numbering is reset

 [Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or
to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
(There will be no manual reset confirmation dialog.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MP4” for movies.

3 Setting Copyright InformationK
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the
image as Exif information.

Select [Copyright information].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.

the option to be set.
2 Select
 Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
 The text entry screen will appear.
 Select [Display copyright info.] to
check the copyright information
currently set.
 Select [Delete copyright
information] to delete the copyright
information currently set.

text.
3 Enter
 See “Text Entry Procedure” on the
next page and enter the copyright
information.
 Enter up to 63 alphanumeric
characters and symbols.

the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
button to exit.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK], then press <0>.

Text Entry Procedure
 Changing the Entry Area:
Press the button to toggle
between the top and bottom entry
areas.
 Moving the Cursor:
Press the keys in the top
area to move the cursor.
 Entering Text:
In the bottom area, press the cross keys or turn the <6> dial
to select a character, then press <0> to enter it.
 Changing the Entry Mode:*
Select [E] at the bottom right of the bottom entry area. Each
time you press <0>, the entry mode will change as follows: Lower
case 9 Numerals / Symbols 1 9 Numerals / Symbols 2 9 Upper
case.
* When [Touch control: Disable] is set, you can enter all characters on one
screen.

 Deleting a Character:
Press the button to delete one character.
 Finishing the Text Entry:
Press the button, check the text, select [OK], then press
<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.
 Canceling the Text Entry:
Press the button, check the text, select [OK], then press
<0>. The screen in step 2 will reappear.

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.404).

3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of horizontally.
You can change the setting for this feature.
Under the [51] tab, select [Auto rotate],
then press <0>. The available settings
are described below. Select the option,
then press <0>.
 [OnzD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback
on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
 [OnD]

: The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the
computer.

: The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

FAQ
 The vertical image is not rotated during the image review just
after shooting.
Press the button and the image playback will display the rotated image.
 [OnzD] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.
Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto
rotate] was set to [Off]. If the vertical image is taken while the camera
is pointed up or down, the image may not be rotated automatically for
playback. In such a case, see “Rotating the Image” on page 283.
 On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image
captured when [OnD] had been set.
Set [OnzD], then play back the image. It will be rotated.
 The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.
The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use EOS
software instead.

B: Checking Camera Settings
When the shooting settings (p.28) are displayed, you can check the
current settings of camera’s major functions by pressing the
button.

Settings display
Card remaining capacity
Color space (p.146)
WB correction (p.134)/
WB bracketing (p.135)
Touch control (p.58)
Red-eye reduction (p.167)
Auto rotate display (p.265)

Date/Time (p.42)
Daylight saving time (p.42)
Beeper (p.256)
Auto power off (p.257)
Sensor cleaning (p.271)
Live View shooting (p.191)

3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsK
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults. This option is available in Creative Zone
modes.

Select [Clear settings].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Clear
settings], then press <0>.

[Clear all camera settings].
2 Select
 Select [Clear all camera settings],
then press <0>.

[OK].
3 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 Setting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the default
settings as shown on pages 268-269.

FAQ
 Clearing all camera settings
After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]
in [54: Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings
(p.336).

Shooting Function Settings

Image Recording Settings

AF area selection
mode

Auto
selection:19 pt
AF

Auto Lighting
Optimizer

u (Single
shooting)

q (Evaluative
metering)

Peripheral
illumination
correction

Enable /
Correction
data retained

Chromatic
aberration
correction

Enable /
Correction
data retained

Exposure
compensation /
AEB

Flash exposure
compensation

Distortion
correction

Disable /
Correction
data retained

Red-eye reduction

Anti-flicker
shooting

Custom White
Balance

Display only
flicker detection

White balance
correction

Viewfinder display

White balance
bracketing

Long exposure
noise reduction

E-TTL II flash
metering

Evaluative flash
metering

High ISO speed
noise reduction

Custom Functions
Flash control

Flash sync.
Auto
speed in Av mode

Dust Delete Data

Camera Settings

Live View Shooting Settings

Live View
shooting

Release shutter
without card

AF point display

Histogram display

Image jump with 6 e (10 images)
Auto rotate

Movie Shooting Settings
AF method

AF with shutter
One-Shot AF
button during
movie recording

Movie recording
size

NTSC:
LD (Standard)
PAL:
LC (Standard)

LCD off/on button

Copyright information Unchanged
Control over HDMI

Eye-Fi transmission Disable

Sound recording Auto

My Menu settings

Display from My Menu Disable
Wi-Fi/NFC

For Wi-Fi/NFC settings, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual.

3 LCD Monitor Off/On Setting
You can set the camera, so that the shooting settings display (p.28)
does not turn on and off as you press the shutter button halfway (or
press the button/Depth-of-field preview button).
Under the [52] tab, select [LCD off/on
btn], then press <0>. The available
settings are described below. Select one,
then press <0>.
 [Shutter btn.] : When you press the shutter button halfway, the
display will turn off. And when you let go of the
shutter button, the display will turn on.
 [Shutter/DISP]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the
display will turn off. And when you let go of the
shutter button, the display remains off. To turn on
the display, press the button.
 [Remains on] : Display remains on even when you press the
shutter button halfway. To turn off the display, press
the button.

3 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color
You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.
Under the [53] tab, select [Screen
color], then press <0>. Select the
desired color, then press <0>.
When you exit the menu, the shooting
settings screen based in the selected
color will be displayed.

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning
manually, or disable it.

Cleaning the Sensor Now

Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.

[Clean nowf].
2 Select
 Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter sound, no picture is
taken.
 For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
 Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option remains disabled temporarily.

Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
 The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.

3 Appending Dust Delete DataK
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (EOS software, p.404) to erase the dust spots
automatically.

Preparation
 Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
 Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
 Set the lens focus mode switch to and set the focus to infinity
(u). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face
towards you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

Obtaining the Dust Delete Data

Select [Dust Delete Data].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.

[OK].
2 Select
 Select [OK] and press <0>. After
the automatic self-cleaning of the
sensor is performed, a message will
appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, no
picture is taken.

3 Appending Dust Delete DataK

a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
 At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.

- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
Select [OK] and the menu will
reappear.
If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [OK]. Take
the picture again.

Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to
erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction
Manual (p.406).
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with EOS software.

3 Manual Sensor CleaningK
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.

Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.

[Clean manually].
2 Select
 Select [Clean manually], then press
<0>.

[OK].
3 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 In a moment, the reflex mirror will
lockup and the shutter will open.

4 Clean the sensor.
the cleaning.
5 End
 Set the power switch to <2>.
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 (sold separately) is
recommended.

3 Manual Sensor CleaningK

 While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
 The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
 Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
 Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
 Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force
can damage the sensor, or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
 If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
 If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

Image Playback
This chapter explains functions related to viewing
photos and movies, with more advanced uses than in
Chapter 2 “Basic Shooting and Image Playback”. Here
you will find explanations of how to play back and erase
photos and movies with the camera and view them on a
TV set.

Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.

x Searching for Images Quickly
H Displaying Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or
100 images on one screen.

Play back the image.
 When you press the button, the
last image captured will be displayed.

to the index display.
2 Switch
 Press the button.
 The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
 Pressing the button will
switch the display as follows: 9
images 9 36 images 9 100 images.
 Pressing the button will switch
the display as follows: 100 images 9
36 images 9 9 images 9 4 images
9 1 image.


an image.
3 Select
 Press the cross keys to move
the orange frame to select the image.
 Turning the <6> dial will display
image(s) on the next or previous
screen.
 Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the
single-image display.

x Searching for Images Quickly

I Jumping through Images (Jump Display)

In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.

Select [Image jump w/6].
 Under the [x2] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.

the jump method.
2 Select
 Press the cross keys to select
the jump method, then press <0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
k: Display by image rating (p.284)
Turn the <6> dial to select.

by jumping.
3 Browse
 Press the button to play back
Jump method
Playback position

images.
 In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
 You can browse images with the
method that was set.

 To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
 To search images by folder, select [Folder].
 If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display only one or the other.
 If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the
images with the <6> dial.

u/y Magnified View
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.

Magnify the image.
 Press the button during image
playback.
 The image will be magnified.
 If you hold down the button, the
image will be magnified until it
reaches the maximum magnification.
 Press the button to reduce
the magnification. If you hold down
the button, the magnification will be
reduced to the single-image display.

Magnified area position

around the image.
2 Scroll
 Use the cross keys to scroll the
magnified image in the direction
pressed.
 To exit magnified view, press the
button and the single-image
display will reappear.

 In magnified view, you can turn the <6> dial to view another image at
the same magnification.
 The image cannot be magnified during the image review just after
shooting.
 A movie cannot be magnified.

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your
fingers for various playback operations. First, press the button
to play back images.

Browsing Images
Swipe with one finger.
 With single-image display, touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
image by swiping your finger to the
left or right.
Swipe to the left to see the next
(newer) image, or swipe to the right to
see the previous (older) image.
 With index display, also touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
screen by swiping your finger up or
down.
Swipe up to see the next (newer)
images or swipe down to see the
previous (older) images.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap on the
image again to display it as a single
image.

Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
Swipe with two fingers.
Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.
When you swipe two fingers to the left or
right, you can jump through images with
the method set in [Image jump w/6]
under the [x2] tab.

d Playing Back with the Touch Screen

Reducing Image (Index Display)
Pinch two fingers.
Touch the screen with two fingers spread
apart, and pinch your fingers together on
the screen.
 Each time you pinch your fingers, the
single-image display will change to
the index display.
 When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap on the
image again to display it as a single
image.

Magnifying Image
Spread two fingers apart.
Touch the screen with two fingers
together, then spread your fingers apart
on the screen.
 As you spread your fingers, the
image will be magnified.
 The image can be magnified up to
approx. 10x.
 You can scroll around the image by
dragging your fingers.
 To reduce the image, pinch your
fingers together on the screen.
 Tapping on the [2] icon will return to
the single-image display.

Touch screen operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible
while playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.298301).

b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

Select [Rotate image].
 Under the [x1] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.

an image.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
the image to be rotated.
 You can also select an image in the
index display (p.278).

the image.
3 Rotate
 Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
 To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
 To exit and return to the menu, press
the button.

 If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.265) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
 If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
 A movie cannot be rotated.

3 Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.

Select [Rating].
 Under the [x2] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.

an image.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
an image or movie to be rated, then
press <0>.
 By pressing the button, you
can select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the button.

the image.
3 Rate
 Press the keys to select a
rating.
 When you select a rating for the
image, the number beside the set
rating will increase by one.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
 To return to the menu, press the
button.

3 Setting Ratings

A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
 With [x2: Image jump w/6], you can display only images having the
specified rating.
 With [x2: Slide show], you can play back only images having the
specified rating.
 With Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.404), you can select
only images with a specific rating (still photos only).
 With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, etc., you can see each file’s
rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image
viewer (still photos only).

Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the button to set the following:
[J: Protect images, b: Rotate image, 9: Rating, U: Creative
filters, S: Resize (JPEG images only), N: Cropping, K: AF point
display, e: Image jump w/6, k: Wi-Fi function*].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
* Not selectable if [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Disable].

Press the button.
 During image playback, press the
button.
 The Quick Control options will
appear.

a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select a
function.
 The name and current setting of the
selected function are displayed at the
bottom of the screen.
 Set it by pressing the keys.
 When setting the Creative filters
(p.312), Resize (p.315), Cropping
(p.317), or Wi-Fi function, also press
<0> to finalize the setting.
 Image jump w/6: Set the Rating
(p.284) by pressing the
button.
 To cancel, press the button.

the setting.
3 Exit
 Press the button to exit the
Quick Control screen.

Q Quick Control for Playback

To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
 Pressing the button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the button again will return to the index display.
 For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.

k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:

Playback on a TV Set (p.298-301)
Use the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) or stereo AV cable AVCDC400ST (sold separately) to connect
the camera to a TV set. Then you can
play back captured movies and still
photos on the TV set.
If you have a High-Definition TV set and
connect your camera with an HDMI
cable, you can watch Full High-Definition
(Full HD: 1920x1080) and HighDefinition (HD: 1280x720) movies with
higher image quality.
 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
 Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
 If the playback device is not compatible with MP4 files, the movie cannot
be played back.

Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.290-297)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.

A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card or played
back with the camera.

k Enjoying Movies

Playback and Editing with a Computer
To play back or edit a movie, use preinstalled or general-purpose software,
compatible with the movie’s recording
format.

If you want to play back or edit a movie with commercially-available
software, use software compatible with MP4-format movies. For details on
commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.

k Playing Back Movies

Play back the image.
 Press the button to display an
image.

a movie.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
the movie to be played back.
 In the single-image display, the
icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a movie. If
the movie is a video snapshot,
will be displayed.
 In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
back from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the single-image
display.

the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
 The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.

back the movie.
4 Play
 Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker

 The movie will start playing back.
 You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
 You can adjust the sound volume by
turning the <6> dial even during
movie playback.
 For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.

The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.

k Playing Back Movies

Movie Playback Panel
Operation

Playback Description

Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.

Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the
keys. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right
of the screen.

Displays the movie’s first frame.

3 Previous
frame

Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is displayed.
If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.

Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.

Displays the movie’s last frame.

F Background
music*

Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(p.297).

Displays the editing screen (p.292).
Playback position

Playback time (minutes:seconds)

Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.290).

Press the button to return to the single-image
display.

* When background music is set, the movie sound will not be played back.

 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17, the continuous playback time at
room temperature (23°C / 73°F) is approx. 2 hr. 20 min.
 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.298, 301),
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.)
 If you take a still photo while you are shooting the movie, the still photo
will be displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

Playback with the Touch Screen
Tap [7] on the center of the screen.
 The movie will start playing back.
 To display the movie playback panel,
tap on the upper left of the
screen.
 To pause the movie while it is playing
back, tap on the screen. The movie
playback panel will also appear.

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.

On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
 The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.

the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
 Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
 Press the keys to see the
previous or next frames. Holding
down the key will fast forward or fast
rewind the frames.
 After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in gray on the top of the screen will
remain.

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

the edited movie.
3 Check
 Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
 To change the editing, go back to step
2.
 To cancel the editing, press the
button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation dialog.

the edited movie.
4 Save
 Select [W], then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK], then press <0> to save the
edited movie and return to the movie
playback screen.

 Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [Z] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

1
Number of images
to be played back

Select [Slide show].
 Under the [x2] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.

the images to be played
2 Select
back.
 Press the keys to select
the desired option, then press <0>.

All images/Movies/Stills
 Press the keys to select
one of the following: [OAll images]
[kMovies] [zStills]. Then press
<0>.

Date/Folder/Rating
 Press the keys to select
one of the following: [iDate]
[nFolder] [9Rating].
 When is highlighted,
press the button.
 Press the keys to select an
option, then press <0>.
[Date]

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Playback Description

All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.

Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.

Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.

Only the movies on the card will be played back.

Only the still photos on the card will be played back.

Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.

[Set up] as desired.
3 Configure
 Press the keys to select
[Set up], then press <0>.
 Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), [Transition
effect] (effect when changing
images), and [Background music]
for the still photos.
 The background music selection
procedure is explained on page 297.
 After selecting the settings, press the
button.
[Display time]

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

[Transition effect]

[Background music]

the slide show.
4 Start
 Press the keys to select
[Start], then press <0>.
 After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.

the slide show.
5 Exit
 To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the
button.

 To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed
on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide
show. You can also pause the slide show by tapping on the screen.
 During auto playback, you can press the button to change the
still photo display format (p.97).
 During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
 During auto playback or pause, you can press the keys to
view another image.
 During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
 The display time may vary depending on the image.
 To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 298.

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Selecting the Background Music
After you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to copy background music to
the card, you can play background music together with the slide show.

Select [Background music].
 Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
 If the card has no background music,
you cannot perform step 2.

the background music.
2 Select
 Press the keys to select
the desired background music, then
press <0>. You can also select
multiple background music tracks.

the background music.
3 Play
 To listen to a sample of the
background music, press the
button.
 Press the keys to play
another background music track. To
stop listening to the background
music, press the button
again.
 Adjust the sound volume by turning
the <6> dial.
 To delete a background music track,
press the keys and select
the track, then press the button.

At the time of purchase, the camera does not have background music. The
procedure to copy background music to a card is explained in the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual (p.406).

Viewing Images on a TV Set
You can view still photos and movies on a TV set.
 If the video system format does not match the TV set’s, movies will not
be displayed properly. In such a case, switch to the proper video system
format with [53: Video system].
 If [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected to
a TV set. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reconnect the camera to the
TV set with an HDMI cable or stereo AV cable.

Viewing on High-Definition (HD) TV Sets (Connected with HDMI)
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.

Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the terminal.

the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.

on the TV set and switch the
3 Turn
TV set’s video input to select the
connected port.

the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
 Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
 Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

the button.
5 Press
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
of the TV set.
 By pressing the button, you
can change the display format.
 To play back movies, see page 290.
The images cannot be output at the same time from both the
and terminals.
 Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
 Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies. In such
a case, use the stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) to
connect to the TV set.

Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.

Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

the camera to a TV set.
2 Connect
 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
 The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does not
switch automatically, use the TV set’s
remote control to select the HDMI IN
port the cable is connected to.

the camera’s button.
3 Press
 An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control to play back images.

an image.
4 Select
 Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu

the remote control’s Enter
5 Press
button.

 The menu appears and you can perform
the playback operations shown on the left.
 Press the / button to select the
desired option, then press the Enter
2
: Return
button. For a slide show, press the
a : 9-image index
remote control’s / button to select
1
: Play movie
an option, then press the Enter button.
c : Slide show
 If you select [Return] and press the
B : Display shooting info
Enter button, the menu will disappear
b
: Rotate
and you can use the / button to
select an image.

Movie playback menu

 Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
 Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [32: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

Viewing on Non-HD TV Sets (Connected with AV Cable)
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) is required.

Connect the AV cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s logo facing
the back of the camera, insert it into
the terminal.

the AV cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.

 Connect the AV cable to the TV set’s
video IN terminal and audio IN
terminals.

on the TV set and switch the
3 Turn
TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the button.
5 Press
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 To play back movies, see page 290.

Do not use any AV cable other than the Stereo AV cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately). Movies may not be displayed if you use a different cable.

K Protecting Images
You can set protections to prevent the precious images from being
erased accidentally.

3 Protecting a Single Image

Select [Protect images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.

[Select images].
2 Select
 Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
 An image will be displayed.

Image protect icon

the image.
3 Protect
 Press the keys to select


the image to be protected, then press
<0>.
The image will be protected, and the
icon will appear at the top of
the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat step
3.
To return to the menu, press the
button.

K Protecting Images

3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].

If you format the card (p.59), the protected images will also be erased.
 Movies can also be protected.
 Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
 If you erase all the images (p.305), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.

L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.302) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure
you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent
important images from being erased accidentally, protect
them. Erasing a RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW
and JPEG images.

Erasing a Single Image

1 Play back the image to be erased.
the button.
2 Press
 The Erase menu will appear.
the image.
3 Erase
 Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.

3 Checkmarking Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By appending checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at once.

Select [Erase images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.

L Erasing Images

[Select and erase images].
2 Select
 Select [Select and erase images],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.

the images to be erased.
3 Select
 Press the keys to select
the image to be erased, then press
<0>.
 A checkmark will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
 By pressing the button, you
can select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the button.
 To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.

the image.
4 Erase
 Press the button.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The selected images will be erased.

3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When
[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.

To erase all images including protected images, format the card (p.59).

B: Shooting Information Display
The information displayed varies depending on the shooting mode and
settings.

Sample Information for Still Photos
 Basic information display
Wi-Fi function
Wi-Fi/Eye-Fi card
transmission status
Battery level

Eye-Fi transfer completed
Rating
Protect images

Playback number/
Total images
recorded

Folder number File number

Image-recording
quality
Aperture

Exposure compensation
amount

Highlight tone priority
ISO speed

B: Shooting Information Display

 Shooting information display
• Detailed information
Exposure compensation amount

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)

Shooting date and time
Shutter speed

Scroll bar
Highlight tone priority

Metering mode
File size

Auto Lighting
Optimizer

Flash exposure compensation
amount /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction

White balance correction
Aperture

Image-recording quality
Picture Style/Settings

* When you shoot in [1+73] image quality, the 1 file size will be displayed.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, will be displayed.
* If a Creative filter or resizing is applied to the image and then saved, will
be displayed.
* For cropped images, and will be displayed.

If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may
not be displayed.

B: Shooting Information Display

• Lens/Histogram information
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Focal length

Histogram display
(RGB)

• White balance information

• Picture Style information

• Color space / Noise
reduction information

• Lens aberration correction
information

• GPS information

Latitude
Longitude
Elevation

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

If GPS information was not recorded for the image, the GPS information
screen will not be displayed.

B: Shooting Information Display

Sample Movie Information Display
Playback
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode

Movie recording size
Frame rate

Movie file size
Shooting time, Playback time
Compression method

* If manual exposure is used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (when
set manually) will be displayed.
* The icon will be displayed for video snapshots.
* The icon will be displayed for Miniature effect movies.

 AF Point Display
When [32: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that has
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.

B: Shooting Information Display

 Highlight Alert
When the shooting information is displayed, any overexposed areas
of the image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the
overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a
negative amount and shoot again.
 Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [x2:
Histogram disp].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution
of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left
Dark image
and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis
indicates how many pixels exist for each
brightness level. The more pixels there are toward
the left, the darker the image. The more pixels
Normal brightness
there are toward the right, the brighter the image.
If there are too many pixels on the left, the shadow
detail will be lost. If there are too many pixels on
the right, the highlight detail will be lost. The
Bright image
gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram,
you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The
horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left
and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels
there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are
too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be
lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too
saturated with no gradation. By checking the image’s RGB histogram,
you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as
white balance inclination.

Post-Processing
Images
After taking a picture, you can apply a Creative filter,
resize the JPEG image (reduce the number of pixels),
or crop the image.

 The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
 Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed when the camera is connected to a computer via
the terminal.

U Applying Creative Filters
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.

Select [Creative filters].
 Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative
filters], then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.

an image.
2 Select
 Select the image you want to apply a
filter to.
 By pressing the button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.

a filter.
3 Select
 When you press <0>, the types of
Creative filters will be displayed
(p.313).
 Press the keys to select a
filter, then press <0>.
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.

the filter effect.
4 Adjust
 Press the keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
 For the Miniature effect, press the
keys and select the image
area (within the white frame) where
you want the image to look sharp,
then press <0>.

U Applying Creative Filters

the image.
5 Save
 Select [OK] to save the image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To apply a filter to another image,
repeat steps 2 to 5.
 To return to the menu, press the
button.
 When shooting 1+73 or 1 image, the filter effect will be applied to
the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image.
 If an aspect ratio was set for a 1 image and the filter effect is applied
to it, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that is set.
 Dust Delete Data (p.272) will not be appended to images with Fish-eye
effect applied.

Creative Filter Characteristics
 V Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.

U Applying Creative Filters

 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will
magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter
effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
 Y Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more
three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note
that the sky, white walls, and similar subjects may not be rendered
with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or have significant
noise.
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth
gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
 b Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it
look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast
by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4, if you press the button (or tap on [T] at the
screen’s bottom), you can switch between the white frame’s vertical
and horizontal orientations.

S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/
b images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.

Select [Resize].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.

an image.
2 Select
 Select the image you want to resize.
 By pressing the button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.

the desired image size.
3 Select
 Press <0> to display the image
Target sizes

sizes.
 Press the keys to select
the desired image size, then press
<0>.

the image.
4 Save
 Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
 To return to the menu, press the
button.

S Resizing JPEG Images

Resize Options by Original Image Size
Available Resize Settings

Original Image
Size

Image Sizes
The image sizes displayed in step 3 on the preceding page, such as
[***M ****x****], have a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image sizes by aspect
ratios are shown in the table below.
The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the
aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
Image
Quality

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2

3984x2656
3552x2664
3984x2240*
2656x2656
(10.6 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels) (8.9 megapixels) (7.1 megapixels)

2976x1984
2656x1992
2976x1680*
1984x1984
(5.9 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels) (5.0 megapixels) (3.9 megapixels)

1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)

720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(0.35 megapixels) (0.31 megapixels) (0.29 megapixels) (0.23 megapixels)

N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop the image as desired and save it as a new image. JPEG
c and RAW images cannot be cropped. The 1+73 image’s
JPEG image can be cropped.

Select [Cropping].
 Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.

an image.
2 Select
 Select the image you want to crop.
 By pressing the button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.

the cropping frame size,
3 Set
aspect ratio, position, and
orientation.
 Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
 The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
Changing the Cropping Frame Size

 Press the or button.
 The cropping frame size will change. The smaller the cropping
frame, the larger the image magnification will be.
Changing the Cropping Frame Aspect Ratio

 Turn the <6> dial.
 Cropping frame aspect ratio will change to [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or
[1:1].

N Cropping JPEG Images

Moving the Cropping Frame

 Press the or keys.
 The cropping frame will move up, down, left, or right.
 You can also touch the cropping frame and drag it to the desired
position.
Rotating the Cropping Frame Orientation

 Press the button.
 The cropping frame will switch between the vertical and horizontal
orientations. This enables you to create a vertical image from a
horizontal one, and vice versa.

the cropped image in the
4 Display
full view.
 Press the button.
 You can see the cropped image.
 To return to the original display, press
the button again.

the image.
5 Save
 Press <0> and select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 5.
 To return to the menu, press the
button.

 You cannot crop an image that has already been cropped.
 You cannot apply a Creative filter or resizing to a cropped image.

Printing Images
 Printing (p.320)
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compliant with
“wPictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.
You can also use a wireless LAN to send images to a
PictBridge (Wireless LAN) printer and print them. For
details, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual.
 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.329)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the
print order to a photofinisher.
 Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.333)
You can specify images on the card for printing in a
photobook.

Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while looking at the setting screens on camera’s LCD monitor.

Connecting the Camera to a Printer

Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.

up the printer.
2 Set
 For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.

the camera to the
3 Connect
printer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 Connect the cable to the camera’s
terminal with the cable
plug’s icon facing the front of
the camera.
 To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.

4 Turn on the printer.
the camera’s power switch to
5 Set
<1>.
 Some printers may make a beeping
sound.

Preparing to Print

back the image.
6 Play
 Press the button.
 The image will appear with the
icon on the upper left of the screen to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.

 Before using the printer, make sure it has a PictBridge connection port.
 Movies cannot be printed.
 The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct
or Bubble Jet Direct.
 Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.
 If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.328).
 If any of the following shooting modes or functions is set, the camera
cannot be connected to a printer. Cancel all the relevant settings, then
reconnect the camera to the printer with an interface cable.
• or in <8> mode
• Multi Shot Noise Reduction
• [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] set to [Enable]
 You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
 When you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged. With a fully-charged battery pack, you can print for approx. 2 hr.
 Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
 For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 (sold separately) to
power the camera is recommended.

w Printing
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon

Select the image to be printed.
 Check that the icon is
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
 Press the keys to select
the image to be printed.

<0>.
2 Press
 The print setting screen will appear.
Print setting screen
Sets the printing effects (p.324).
Sets the date or file number imprinting to on or off.
Sets the quantity to be printed.
Sets the print area (p.327).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.

* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.

[Paper settings].
3 Select
 Select [Paper settings], then press
<0>.
 The paper settings screen will
appear.

Q Setting the Paper Size
 Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The paper type screen will appear.

Y Setting the Paper Type
 Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The page layout screen will appear.

U Setting the Page Layout
 Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
 The print setting screen will reappear.
Bordered

Prints with white borders along the edges.

Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless
prints, the print will have borders.

Imprints the shooting information*1 on the border on 9x13 cm or
larger prints.

Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.

20-upc
35-upp
Default

Prints 20 or 35 images as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper*2.
• Imprints the shooting information*1 with [20-upc].
The page layout varies depending on the printer model or its settings.

*1: From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter
speed, aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance,
etc., are imprinted.
*2: After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.329), printing
by following “Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images” (p.332) is recommended.
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio, the
image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print. If the
image is cropped, the print may look grainier due to the fewer number of pixels.

the printing effects (image
4 Set
optimization).
 Set them if necessary. If you do not need
to set any printing effects, go to step 5.
 Contents displayed on the screen
vary depending on the printer.
 Select the option, then press <0>.
 Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
 If the icon is displayed
brightly, you can also adjust the
printing effects (p.326).
Printing Effect

Prints with the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif data
is used to make automatic corrections.

No automatic correction is applied.

Prints with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and
greens.

Image noise is reduced before printing.

Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.

0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
zNatural

Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic
color adjustments are applied.

Printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting.
However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than
with “Natural”.

Printing differs depending on the printer. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.

* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left of the screen. Note that the printed image may look
slightly different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation.
This also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 326.
If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO
speed (H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.

the date and file number
5 Set
imprinting.
 Set them if necessary.
 Select , then press <0>.
 Set the print settings as desired, then
press <0>.

the number of copies.
6 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Select , then press <0>.
 Set the number of copies, then press
<0>.

printing.
7 Start
 Select [Print], then press <0>.

 The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
 Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
 If image tilt correction (p.327) is applied, it may take longer to print the
image.
 To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
 If you execute [54: Clear all camera settings] (p.267), all the settings
will revert to their defaults.

e Adjusting Printing Effects
In step 4 on page 324, select the printing
effect. When the icon is
displayed brightly, you can press the
button. You can then adjust the
printing effects. What can be adjusted or
what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
 Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
 Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press
the button to change the position of
the . Press the keys to freely
adjust the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255).
 kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions where the subject’s face looks dark.
When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
 Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eyes. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
 The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
 When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color
balance], press the or keys. B is for blue, A for
amber, M for magenta, G for green. The image’s color balance will be
adjusted towards the color in the direction of move.
 If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.

Cropping the Image
Tilt correction

You can crop the image and print only an
enlarged version of the cropped portion,
as if the image is recomposed.
Set the cropping right before printing.
If you change the print settings after
setting the cropping, you may have to set
the cropping again before printing.

1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Press the or button to change the cropping frame
size. The smaller the cropping frame, the larger the image
magnification will be for printing.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Press the cross keys to move the frame over the image
vertically or horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers
the desired image area.
Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame
Pressing the button will toggle the cropping frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image Tilt Correction
By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the icon on the screen will turn blue.

3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.

The print setting screen will reappear.
You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print setting screen.

 Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
 The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
 Check the camera’s LCD monitor while cropping the image. If you look at
the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed
accurately.

Handling Printer Errors
If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer to resume
printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s instruction
manual.

Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the problem,
resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.
The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They
cannot be set individually for each image.)

Setting the Printing Options

Select [Print order].
 Under the [x1] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.

[Set up].
2 Select
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.

the option as desired.
3 Set
 Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
 Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting, then
press <0>.
[Print type]

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Date
File number

Prints one image on one sheet.

Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.

Prints both the standard and index prints.

[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.

the setting.
4 Exit
 Press the <7> button.
 The print order screen will reappear.
 Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.

 RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
images with PictBridge (p.320).
 Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
 With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
 When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
have been set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you
just extract images from the card and try to print them.
 Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
 Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may
be overwritten. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on
the image type.

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Print Ordering
 Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
By pressing the button, you can
select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the button.
Press the button to save the
print order to the card.

Quantity
Total images selected

Checkmark
Index icon

[Standard] [Both]
Press the keys to set the
number of copies to be printed for the
displayed image.
[Index]
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box . The image will be included in
the index print.

 Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select
[Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that
folder will all be canceled.
 All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
 Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All image].
 When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be
printed.

W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.

Prepare to print.
See page 320.
Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to step 5.

2 Under the [x1] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].

[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.

4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.322).

Set the printing effects (p.324) if necessary.

5 Select [OK].
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
 Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.





 If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images,
select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the following occurs.
• You changed the print order or deleted any of the print ordered images
before resuming the printing.
• When index is set, you changed the paper setting before resuming the
printing.
• The card’s remaining capacity was low when you paused the printing.
 If a problem occurs during printing, see page 328.

p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,
the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function
is useful for ordering photobooks online.

Specifying One Image at a Time

Select [Photobook Set-up].
 Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.

[Select images].
2 Select
 Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
 An image will be displayed.

the image to be specified.
3 Select
 Press the keys to select


the image to be specified, then press
<0>.
By pressing the button, you
can select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the button.
Repeat this step to select other
images. The number of images that
have been specified will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
To cancel the image specification,
press <0> again.
To return to the menu, press the
button.

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To cancel the image specification, select
[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on
card].

 RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
 Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another
camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings
may be overwritten.

Customizing the
Camera

You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative
Zone modes.

3 Setting Custom FunctionsK

Custom Function number

Select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
Functions (C.Fn)], then press <0>.

the Custom Function
2 Select
number.
 Press the keys to select
the Custom Function number, then
press <0>.

the setting as desired.
3 Change
 Press the keys to select
the desired setting (number), then
press <0>.
 Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to
set other Custom Functions.
 At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.

the setting.
4 Exit
 Press the button.
 The screen for step 1 will reappear.

Clearing All Custom Functions
Under [54: Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to
clear all the Custom Function settings (p.267).

3 Setting Custom FunctionsK

Custom Functions
C.Fn I: Exposure
1

Exposure level increments

kMovie
Shooting

C.Fn II: Image
3

Highlight tone priority

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
4

AF-assist beam firing

AF area selection method

Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking

AF point display during focus

VF display illumination

* When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used.

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
10

Shutter/AE lock button

Assign SET button

LCD display when power ON

Retract lens on power off

p.343
p.344
p.345

k
k
(Except 3) (Except 2, 3, 6)*

* Settings 1 and 4 do not function during movie shooting.
* [5: ISO speed] is settable only for manual exposure shooting.

The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)

3 Custom Function SettingsK
Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn
IV: Operation/Others.

C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn-1

Exposure level increments

0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is
effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine
increments than 1/3-stop increments.
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed as shown below.

0: Off
1: On
When you set the ISO speed, you can set “H” (equivalent to ISO
25600) for still photos and “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) for
movies. Note that if [C.Fn-3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1:
Enable], “H” cannot be set.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn II: Image
C.Fn-3

Highlight tone priority

0: Disable
1: Enable
Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from
the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between
the grays and highlights becomes smoother.
 With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.136) is automatically set to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.
 With setting 1, noise (grainy image, banding, etc.) may become slightly
more noticeable than with setting 0.
With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800 (up to ISO
6400 for movies).
Also, the icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
monitor to indicate that highlight tone priority is enabled.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
C.Fn-4

AF-assist beam firing

Enables or disables the built-in flash’s AF-assist beam or the EOSdedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
0: Enable
The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary.
1: Disable
The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. This prevents the AFassist beam from disturbing others.
2: Enable external flash only
If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam
when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AFassist beam.
3: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. Set this when you do not want the camera to
fire the AF-assist beam as a burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set
to [Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist
beam will not be emitted.

AF area selection method

You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
0: S 9 AF area selection button
After you press the or button, each time you press the
button, the AF area selection mode changes.
1: S 9 Main Dial
After you press the or button, turning the <6> dial
changes the AF area selection mode.
 With setting 1, press the or keys to move the AF point.
 When Battery Grip BG-E18 (sold separately) is used and 1 is set, you
can change the AF area selection mode by operating the battery grip.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking

Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin tones.
This function works in One-Shot AF mode when the AF area selection mode
is set to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or 19-point AF auto selection.
0: One-Shot AF only
In One-Shot AF mode, the camera selects AF points automatically
based on AF information and information on colors equivalent to
skin tones. This makes focusing on people easier, so you can
prioritize composition in shooting.
1: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF
information. Generally, the nearest subject will be focused on.
 With setting 0, focusing will take slightly longer than with setting 1.
 Even with setting 0, the expected result may not be obtained depending
on the shooting conditions and subject.
 Under light so low that the flash emits the AF-assist beam automatically,
AF points are selected automatically based only on AF information. (The
AF will not use information on colors equivalent to skin tones.)

AF point display during focus

You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following cases: 1.
when selecting the AF point(s), 2. when the camera is ready to shoot (before
AF operation), 3. during AF operation, and 4. when focus is achieved.
0: Selected (constant)
The selected AF point(s) is always displayed.
1: All (constant)
All 19 AF points are always displayed.
2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.
3: Selected (focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4.
4: Disable display
For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.
With setting 2 or 3, the AF point will not be displayed even when focus is
achieved with AI Servo AF.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

VF display illumination

You can set whether or not the AF points in the viewfinder will light up
in red when focus is achieved.
0: Auto
The AF points automatically light up in red under low light.
1: Enable
The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.
2: Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.
When AI Servo AF is set, there is no illumination in red even when focus is
achieved.
 When you press the or button, the AF points will be
illuminated in red regardless of this setting.
 The aspect ratio lines (p.120), and the grid and flicker detection set with
[52: Viewfinder display] will also light up in red.

0: Disable
1: Enable
Prevents camera shake due to camera vibrations in the camera
caused by the reflex mirror action (mirror shock), when shooting
with super telephoto lenses or close-ups (macro photography).
See page 163 for the mirror lockup procedure.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
C.Fn-10

Shutter/AE lock button

0: AF/AE lock
1: AE lock/AF
This is convenient when you want to focus and meter separately.
Press the button to autofocus, and press the shutter button
halfway to apply AE lock.
2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock
During AI Servo AF, you can press the button to pause the
AF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown
off by any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The
exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
3: AE/AF, no AE lock
This is useful for subjects that keep moving and stopping
repeatedly. During AI Servo AF, you can press the button to
start or stop the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the
moment the picture is taken. Thus, you can set your camera, so
that the optimum focusing and exposure can be achieved and wait
for the decisive moment.
During Live View shooting or movie shooting
 With setting 1 or 3, press the button for One-Shot AF. Also, AF will
not take effect for shooting during touch shutter.
 With setting 2, press the shutter button halfway for One-Shot AF.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

Assign SET button

You can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. When the camera
is ready to shoot, pressing the <0> button will display the respective
function setting screen.
0: Normal (disabled)
1: Image quality
The image quality setting screen will appear.
2: Flash exposure compensation
The flash exposure compensation setting screen will appear.
3: LCD monitor On/Off
You can turn on or off the LCD monitor.
4: Menu display
The menu screen will appear.
5: ISO speed
The ISO speed setting screen will appear.
6: Flash function settings
The built-in flash or external flash function setting screen will
appear.

LCD display when power ON

0: Display on
When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settings will be
displayed (p.61).
1: Previous display status
If you press the button and turn off the camera while the
LCD monitor is off, the shooting settings will not be displayed
when you turn on the camera again. This helps to save battery
power. The menu screens and image playback will still function
when used.
If you press the button to display the shooting settings and
then turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be displayed
when you turn on the camera again.

3 Custom Function SettingsK

Retract lens on power off

This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You
can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s
power switch is set to .
0: Enable
1: Disable
 With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
 Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
With setting 0, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s focus mode
switch setting (AF or MF).

3 Registering My MenuK
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.

Select [My Menu settings].
 Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu
settings], then press <0>.

[Register to My Menu].
2 Select
 Select [Register to My Menu], then
press <0>.

the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the item, then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select [OK]
and press <0> to register the item.
 You can register up to six items.
 To return to the screen in step 2,
press the button.

My Menu Settings
 Sort
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then
press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the keys to
change the order, then press <0>.
 Delete item/items and Delete all items
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all
registered items.
 Display from My Menu
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you
display the menu screen.

This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.

Certification Logo
Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.

3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor.

Select [Battery info.].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
 The battery info. screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
The battery level icon (p.41) is displayed.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in one of three levels.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge
performance is fine.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge
performance is slightly
degraded.
(Red) : Purchasing a new
battery is recommended.

The use of a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17 is recommended. If you
use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, this camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
 The battery information will be displayed even when Battery Grip BGE18 is used. If two LP-E17 battery packs are attached, it displays the
remaining battery level of the two combined.
 If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the
message.

Using a Household Power Outlet
With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18 (sold separately), you can connect the
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining
battery level.

Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.
 Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the
AC Adapter’s socket.

the power cord.
2 Connect
 Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
 After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.

the DC Coupler.
3 Insert
 Open the battery compartment cover
and insert the DC Coupler until it
securely locks in place.

in the DC cord.
4 Push
 Open the DC cord hole cover and
install the cord as shown in the
illustration.
 Close the battery compartment cover.

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord when the camera’s power
switch is set to <1>.

Remote Control Shooting
Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately)
This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to
approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet away from the camera. You can either shoot
immediately or use a 2-sec. delay.

Remote control sensor

 Set the drive mode to (p.114).
 Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control
sensor and press the transmit button.
 The camera will autofocus.
 When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light up and the
picture will be taken.

 Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
 If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
 Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used.
 Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite
equipped with a remote-release function.
 The Remote Controller can also be used during movie shooting (p.221).
Note that Remote Controller RC-5 cannot be used to take still photos in
the movie shooting mode.

Remote Control Shooting

F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold Separately)
Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx. 60
cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control
terminal, it can be pressed halfway and completely, just like the shutter
button.

Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
picture to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.33)
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the
eyepiece cover is unnecessary.

Detach the eyecup.
 Push the bottom of the eyecup to
detach it.

the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
 Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
 After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup by sliding it down into the
eyepiece groove.

H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions
(including wireless transfer). In case of a problem with an EyeFi card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note
that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries
or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted.
If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in
your area, please check with the card manufacturer.

1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.37).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
 Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
 This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.

Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
 Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 If you set [Disable], there will be no
automatic transmission even with the
Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission
status icon I).

the connection information.
4 Display
 Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
 Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
 You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
 Press the button three times
to exit the menu.

the picture.
6 Take
 The picture is transferred and the
icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
 For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
Transmission status icon
display (p.306).
H (Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H (Blinking) Connecting...: Connecting to access point.
H (Illuminated) Connected: Connection to access point established.
H () Transferring...
: Image transfer to access point in progress.
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
 If [51:Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card
is not possible.
 If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
 Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
 If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
 Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
 The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmits.
 The battery power will be consumed faster.
 During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
 If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi settings]
will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon will not appear.

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function

: Not selectable/Disabled
8
C P x 6

All image quality settings selectable k k k k k k k k k k k k*1 k*1
Automatically set/Auto o o o o o o o o o o o o
o
ISO speed
Manually set
Picture
Style

Automatically set/Auto D D D D D D D D D D D D

Extra Effect Shot*1
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur
Color tone
Creative filters*1*2
Auto
White
balance

Manual selection

k
k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k
k
k k
k k k k k k k k k
k
o o o o o o o o o o o o

Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing

High ISO speed noise reduction o o o o o o o o o o o
Highlight tone priority

Anti-flicker shooting*3

o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o

o o o o o o o o o

Auto Lighting Optimizer

o o o o o o o o o o o

Peripheral illumination correction k k k k k k k k k k k
Lens
aberration Chromatic aberration correction k k k k k k k k k k k
correction Distortion correction
k k k k k k k k k k k
Long exposure noise reduction

sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Center-weighted
average metering
Metering mode
selection

*1: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.
*3: Works only during viewfinder shooting.

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Function
AF operation One-Shot AF
(Viewfinder AI Servo AF
shooting)
AI Focus AF

AF operation
One-Shot AF
(Live View
o o o o o o o o o
shooting)
AF area selection mode
AF

AF point selection
AF-assist beam
Continuous AF*2

o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o
o o
o
o o o o o
k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Program shift
Exposure compensation
Exposure

AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
Single shooting

k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Continuous shooting k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Silent single
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
shooting*3
Silent continuous
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
shooting*3
Self-timer

k k k k k k k k k k k
k
k k
k
k
o
Manual firing
k
k k
k
k k
Flash off
k o k k o k o k k o
Red-eye reduction k
k k
k
k k
k

Automatic firing

FE lock*3
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control

Function settings
Custom Function settings

Live View shooting

k k k k k k k k k

Aspect ratio
Quick Control
Feature guide

k k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Still Photo Shooting in Creative Zone Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function

Peripheral illumination
correction

Chromatic aberration
correction

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

All image quality settings selectable
ISO speed
Picture Style

: Not selectable/Disabled

Automatically set/Auto
Manually set
Automatically set/Auto
Manual selection

Extra Effect Shot
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur
Color tone
Creative filters*1*2
Auto
White balance

Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Lens aberration
correction

Distortion correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
Anti-flicker shooting*3
Color space
Metering mode

sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Metering mode selection

*1: 1+73 or 1 cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.
*3: Works only during viewfinder shooting.

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Function
One-Shot AF

AF operation
AI Servo AF
(Viewfinder shooting)
AI Focus AF

AF operation
(Live View shooting) One-Shot AF

AF point selection

Continuous AF*2

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field preview
Single shooting
Continuous shooting

Exposure compensation
Exposure

AF area selection mode
AF

Silent single shooting*3
Silent continuous shooting*3
Self-timer

Automatic firing
Manual firing

k
k
Built-in flash
Red-eye reduction
k
FE lock
k
Flash exposure compensation
k
Wireless control
k
Function settings
k
External flash
Custom Function settings
k
Live View shooting
k
Aspect ratio
k
Quick Control
k
Feature guide
k
*4: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
Flash off

k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable

: Not selectable/Disabled

Movies
Function

y
All image quality settings
selectable (movie)
All image quality settings
selectable (still photos)

Still Photos
z*1

A 7 C 2 3 4 5 8 d sfa

k k k k k k k k k k k k
k k k

k k k k k k k k k k k k

Miniature effect movie

k k k k k k k k k k k k k*2 k*2 k*2

Automatically set/Auto o o o o o o o o o o o k o

Automatically set/Auto o o o o o o o o k k k k o k k

Manually set
Manual selection
Auto

o o o o o o o o k k k k o k k

Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer

o o o o o o o o k k k k o k k

Peripheral illumination
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
correction
Lens
aberration Chromatic aberration
k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
correction correction
Distortion correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
Color
space

*1: The z icon indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.
*2: Still photos with a Miniature effect will be taken.

o o o o o o o o o o o o o k k
k k

Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode

Movies
Function

A 7 C 2 3 4 5 8 d sfa

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

FlexiZone - Multi

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

FlexiZone - Single k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Manual focus
(MF)

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

AE lock
Exposure
Exposure
compensation

AEB
Depth-of-field preview

Single shooting

Continuous
shooting*4
Silent single
shooting
Silent continuous
shooting

Built-in flash
Aspect ratio
Sound recording

k k k k k k k k k k k k

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

*3: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*4: Works only before you start shooting a movie.

ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 90EX

Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15ll

Magnifier
MG-Ef

430EX II 600EX-RT/ Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite
600EX
MR-14EX II
MT-24EX

Bundled
Accessories
Eyecup Ef

Rubber Frame Ef
Wide Strap
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses

AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E18
Semi Hard Case
EH26-L/EH27-L

Battery Pack
LP-E17

AC Adapter
AC-E6

Hand Strap E2
Battery Grip
BG-E18

Battery Charger
LC-E17 or LC-E17E

DC Coupler
DR-E18

GPS Receiver
GP-E2

Remote
Controller
RC-6

Remote Switch
RS-60E3

External microphone

HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)

Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

Connect Station CS100

EOS DIGITAL
Solution Disk

PictBridge-compatible printer
Interface Cable
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)

Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U
(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
USB port
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card

Card reader
Card slot

* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.

3 Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
r Shooting 1 (Red)

73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /
1+73* / 1*

Enable / Touch to y / Disable

Release shutter
without card

Enable / Disable

Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold

Lens aberration
correction

Peripheral illumination correction: Enable / Disable
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable / Disable

Distortion correction: Disable / Enable

Red-eye reduction

Disable / Enable

Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /
External flash function settings / External flash
C.Fn setting / Clear settings

* Not selectable in the and modes.

s Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure
compensation/AEB

1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB:
±2 stops)

Auto Lighting
Optimizer

Disable / Low / Standard / High

Custom White Balance

Manual setting of white balance

White balance shift/
bracketing

WB correction: White balance correction
BKT setting: White balance bracketing

sRGB / Adobe RGB

DAuto / PStandard /QPortrait /
RLandscape /SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3

q Evaluative metering / w Partial metering /
r Spot metering /
e Center-weighted average metering

Disabled in manual exposure

Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

3 Menu Settings

t Shooting 3 (Red)

Dust Delete Data

Obtain data to be used by EOS software to
delete dust spots

Max. ISO 400, Max. ISO 800, Max. ISO 1600,
Max. ISO 3200, Max. ISO 6400

Long exposure noise
reduction

Disable / Auto / Enable

High ISO speed noise
reduction

Disable / Low / Standard / High /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction

3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1

Anti-flicker shooting

Disable / Enable

i Live View Shooting (Red)
Live View shooting

Enable / Disable

u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single

Enable / Disable

Disable / Enable

Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m

4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.

Specify images to be printed (DPOF)

Photobook Set-up

Specify images for a photobook

Creative filters

Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Art bold effect / Water painting effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect

Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count

1 Playback 1 (Blue)

3 Menu Settings

2 Playback 2 (Blue)

Crop part of the image

[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p

Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music

Image jump with 6

1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating

AF point display

Disable / Enable

Histogram display

Brightness / RGB

Control over HDMI

Disable / Enable

Create and select a folder

Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset

OnzD / OnD / Off

Initialize and erase data on the card

4 Set-up 1 (Yellow)

Disable / Enable
Allow NFC connections

Transfer images between cameras / Connect to
smartphone / Print from Wi-Fi printer / Upload
to Web service / View images on DLNA devices

Eye-Fi settings

Displayed when a commercially-available EyeFi card is inserted

* For details, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.

3 Menu Settings

6 Set-up 2 (Yellow)

30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /
15 min. / Disable

Adjust the brightness (seven levels)

LCD off/on button

Shutter button / Shutter/T / Remains on

Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone

Select the interface language

Grid display: Hide / Show

Flicker detection: Show / Hide

Viewfinder display
GPS device settings

Settings available when the GPS Receiver
GP-E2 (sold separately) is attached

 When using Wi-Fi function or GPS device, be sure to check the countries
and areas of use, and use the device in accordance with the laws and
regulations of the country or region.
 [Wi-Fi/NFC] cannot be set if the camera is connected to a computer,
printer, GPS receiver, TV set, or other device with a cable. When [Wi-Fi/
NFC] is set to [Enable], you cannot connect the camera to the above
devices with a cable.
 When connecting this camera and the GPS Receiver GP-E2 with a
cable, update the firmware of GP-E2 to Ver.2.0.0 or later. With the older
versions, you cannot use this camera and GP-E2 connected with a
cable. Note that GP-E2 can be used by attaching it to the camera’s hot
shoe.
For how to update the firmware, refer to the Canon Web site or contact
the nearest Canon Service Center.

3 Menu Settings

7 Set-up 3 (Yellow)

Select the shooting settings screen color

Enable / Disable

Standard / Sensitive / Disable

Battery information

Remaining capacity / Recharge performance

Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning

Certification Logo
Display

Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications

Custom Functions
(C.Fn)

Customize camera functions as desired

C Set-up 4 (Yellow)

Display copyright information /
Enter author’s name /
Copyright information
Enter copyright details /
Delete copyright information

Clear all camera settings /
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)

zfirmware ver.*

For updating the firmware

* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental
operations.

9 My Menu (Green)
My Menu settings

Register frequently-used menu options and
Custom Functions

3 Menu Settings

k Movie Shooting
r Shooting 1 (Red)

73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /
1+73 / 1

Enable / Touch to y / Disable

Release shutter
without card

Enable / Disable

Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold

Lens aberration
correction

Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable

s Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure
compensation
Auto Lighting
Optimizer

1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments, ±3 stops
Disable / Low / Standard / High
Disable during manual exposure

Custom white
balance

Manual setting of white balance

White balance shift/
bracketing

WB correction: White balance correction
BKT setting: White balance bracketing

sRGB / Adobe RGB

DAuto / PStandard /
QPortrait / RLandscape /
SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3

 Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
 The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder
shooting/Live View shooting and movie shooting. Note that the menu
tabs and options displayed in [x1] Playback 1, [x2] Playback 2, [51]
Set-up 1 to [54] Set-up 4 and [9] My Menu are the same as those
displayed in viewfinder shooting/Live View shooting (p.363-366).
 The [Z1] and [Z2] menu tabs will appear only for movie shooting.

3 Menu Settings

t Shooting 3 (Red)
Dust Delete Data

Obtain data to be used by EOS software to
delete dust spots

v Movie 1 (Red)
AF method

u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single

Enable / Disable

AF with shutter button
during movie shooting One-Shot AF / Disable
k

Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m

4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.

• 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 640x480
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
• Standard / Light

w Movie 2 (Red)
Movie recording size

Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording*

Recording level
Wind filter: Auto / Disable
Attenuator: Disable / Enable

Video snapshot: Enable / Disable
Video snapshot

Album settings: Create a new album / Add to
existing album
Show confirm message: Enable/Disable

* In Basic Zone modes, [Sound recording] will be set to [On/Off].

Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

Power-Related Problems
The battery pack does not recharge.
 Do not use any battery pack other than a genuine Battery Pack
LP-E17.

The battery charger’s lamp blinks.
 If (1) the battery charger or battery pack has a problem or (2)
communication with the battery pack failed (with a non-Canon battery
pack), the protection circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will
blink in orange. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug
from the power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery pack to the
charger. Wait a few minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the
power outlet. If the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest
Canon Service Center.

The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <1>.






Make sure the battery is properly installed in the camera (p.36).
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.36).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.37).
Recharge the battery (p.34).
Press the button (p.61).

The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <2>.
 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,
the access lamp will remain on/continue to blink for a few seconds.
When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off
automatically.

Troubleshooting Guide

[Battery communication error. Does this battery/do these
batteries display the Canon logo?] is displayed.
 Do not use any battery pack other than a genuine Battery Pack LPE17.
 Remove and install the battery again (p.36).
 If the battery contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.

The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
 Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.34).
 The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]
to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.348). If the
battery performance is poor, replace the battery pack with a new one.
 The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over
repeated use. Purchase a new one.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is operating.

The camera turns off by itself.
 Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.257).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s
power does not turn off.) Press the button to turn on the LCD
monitor.

Troubleshooting Guide

Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
 The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.45).

The viewfinder is dark.
 Install a recharged battery pack in the camera (p.34).

No images can be shot or recorded.
 Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.37).
 Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the write/erase position (p.37).
 If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.37, 304).
 If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator
in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the
shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
manually (p.50, 111).

The card cannot be used.
 If a card error message is displayed, see page 37 or 382.

The image is out of focus.





Set the lens’s focus mode switch to (p.45).
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.49-50).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.150), set a higher ISO speed (p.122), use flash (p.166), or
use a tripod.

Troubleshooting Guide

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
 Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the
AI Servo AF mode, or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode
(p.100).

Linear noise or moire appears in the image.
 Depending on the subject, linear noise or moire may be recorded in
the image. It is likely to occur especially in the following cases.
• Shooting fine horizontal stripes, lattice patterns, etc.
• When there is an intense light source such as sunlight or lighting in
or near the shooting range.
In such a case, noise and moire may be reduced by the following
measures.
• Change the size of the subject by changing the focusing distance or
zoom magnification.
• Recompose the shot to prevent an intense light source from entering
the shooting range.
• Attach the lens hood to prevent intense light from entering the lens.
 If you use a TS-E lens and shift or tilt, linear noise or moire may be
recorded in the image.

Horizontal stripes appear, or the exposure or color tone look
strange.
 Horizontal stripes (noise) or irregular exposures can be caused by
fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during
viewfinder or Live View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone may
not come out right. A slow shutter speed may solve the problem.

Troubleshooting Guide

The continuous shooting speed is slow.
 Depending on the lens type, shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may
become slower.
 If [z3: Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to [Enable] and you shoot under a
flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower, or the continuous shooting interval may become
irregular. Also, the time lag until shutter release may be slightly longer
than usual (p.144).
 If you set [Distortion] to [Enable], the continuous shooting speed will
decrease (p.141).

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the
file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number mentioned on page 117.

ISO 100 cannot be set.
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is set, ISO
100 can be set (p.339). This also applies to movie shooting (p.226).

ISO speed [H] (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be set.
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the [H] ISO speed (equivalent to ISO 25600)
cannot be selected even when [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1: On]. If
[0: Disable] is set for [3: Highlight tone priority], [H] can be set
(p.339).

The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.
 Under [54: Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [3: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. If [0:
Disable] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.339).

Troubleshooting Guide

Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
 Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
out bright (p.136).

When I use the mode with flash, the shutter speed
becomes slow.
 If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.174).

The built-in flash rises by itself.
 In shooting modes ( <2> <4> <6>) whose
default setting is (Auto flash), the built-in flash will be raised
automatically when necessary.
 In the and modes, when you press the shutter button
halfway under low-light conditions, the built-in flash may be raised
automatically and emit the AF-assist beam.

The built-in flash does not fire.
 If you use the built-in flash too often in too short a period of time, the
flash may stop firing for a while to protect the light-emitting unit.

Troubleshooting Guide

The external flash always fires at full output.
 If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.172).
 Under [z1: Flash control], if [Flash metering mode] in [External
flash C.Fn setting] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the
flash will always fire at full output (p.178).

Flash exposure compensation cannot be set for the
external Speedlite.
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, flash
exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to
0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.

High-speed sync cannot be set in the mode.
 Under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to
[Auto] (p.174).

The camera makes a small noise when it is shaken.
 A small noise may be heard when the camera’s internal mechanism
moves slightly.

The shutter makes two shooting sounds during
Live View shooting.
 If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot
(p.193).

Troubleshooting Guide

During Live View or movie shooting, a white or
red icon is displayed.
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or
movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.218, 253).

Movie shooting stops by itself.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “
” or faster card. To
find out the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s Web site, etc.
 If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
 In shooting modes other than , the ISO speed is set
automatically. In the mode, you can freely set the ISO speed
(p.226).

The exposure changes during movie shooting.
 If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
 Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.

The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
 If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning)
or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.

Troubleshooting Guide

The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during
movie shooting.
 Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or
color tone may be recorded. In the mode, a slow shutter speed
may reduce the problem.

Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi cannot be set.
 If the camera is connected to a computer, printer, GPS receiver, TV
set, or other device with a cable, Wi-Fi cannot be set ([51: Wi-Fi/NFC]
will be grayed out). Disconnect the cable before changing any settings.
 For details, refer to the Wi-Fi/NFC Function Instruction Manual.

Operation Problems
During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly
sounds softer.
 Check if your finger is blocking the speaker (p.26).

Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.
 In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and
menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative
Zone mode (p.53).

Troubleshooting Guide

The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
 Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.146).

The file name starts with “MVI_”.
 It is a movie file (p.262).

The file numbering does not start from 0001.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
not start from 0001 (p.262).

The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
 Check that the correct date and time are set (p.42).
 Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.42).

The date and time are not in the picture.
 The shooting date and time do not appear in the picture. The date and
time are instead recorded in the image data as shooting information.
When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using
the date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.325).

[###] is displayed.
 If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.285).

The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
 If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
 In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

Troubleshooting Guide

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
 [Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.352).

Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
 It is the highlight alert (p.310). Overexposed areas with clipped
highlight will blink.

The image cannot be erased.
 If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.302).

The movie cannot be played back.
 Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.

Camera operation noise can be heard when the movie is
played back.
 If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone
(commercially available) is recommended (p.251).

The movie has still moments.
 During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. In such cases, shoot in mode (p.225).

Troubleshooting Guide

No picture on the TV set.
 Check that the HDMI cable or stereo AV cable’s plug is inserted all the
way in (p.298-301).
 Set the [53: Video system] correctly to [NTSC] or [PAL] (depending
on the video system of your TV set).
 If [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected
to a TV set. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reconnect the camera
to the TV set with the HDMI cable or stereo AV cable.

There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
 If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.235).

My card reader does not recognize the card.
 Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera
to the computer with the interface cable, then transfer the images to
your computer using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.404).

I cannot resize the image. I cannot crop the image.
 JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized or cropped (p.315,
p.317).

A red box is displayed on the image.
 [32: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.309).

A red box is not displayed on the image.
 Even if [32: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.309), the red box is
not displayed for the following images:
• Images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction (p.137)
• Images recorded with distortion correction enabled (p.141)
• Images shot with or in <8> mode
• Cropped images (p.317)
• Images with Fish-eye effect applied after shooting (p.312)

Troubleshooting Guide

Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
 If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
picture is taken (p.271).

Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
interval, the icon may not be displayed (p.40).

Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than listed in
the instruction manual.
 Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer. This
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.324).

Direct printing does not work.
 If any of the following shooting modes or functions is set, the camera
cannot be connected to a printer. Cancel all the relevant settings, then
reconnect the camera to the printer with an interface cable.
• or in <8> mode
• Multi Shot Noise Reduction
• [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] set to [Enable]

Computer Connection Problems
I cannot download images to a computer.
 Install the EOS software (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD-ROM) on
the computer (p.404).
 If [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected
to a computer. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reconnect the
camera to a computer with an interface cable.

Error Codes
Error number

If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.

Cause and countermeasures
Number

Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
 Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery pack again (p.25, 26, 36).
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card
with camera.
 Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.37, 59).
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.

 Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.37, 304, 59).
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on
again.
 Operate the power switch (p.40).

Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
 Operate the power switch (p.40).

10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99

An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
 Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack
again, or use a Canon lens (p.40, 36, 45).

* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your
nearest Canon Service Center.

Handling Precautions: STM Lenses (Kit Lenses)
Kit lenses* use a stepping motor that drives the focus lens. The motor
controls the focus lens even during zooming.
* EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM, EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM, and EF-S55250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM

1. When the camera is OFF
The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the
camera is OFF due to the auto power off function. Therefore, users
must be aware of the following points.
 Manual focusing is not possible.
 During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.
2. When the lens is in sleep mode
If not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep
mode in order to save power, apart from the camera’s auto power off.
To exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.
In sleep mode, the motor will not operate even if the camera is ON.
Therefore, users must be aware of the following points.
 Manual focusing is not possible.
 During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.
3. During initial reset
When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by
pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to
the auto power off function*1, the lens performs an initial reset of the
focus lens.
 Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus
during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.
 Wait approx. 1 second*2 until the initial reset has completed
before shooting.
*1: Applicable to the following EF-S lens compatible digital SLR cameras:
EOS 7D Mark II, EOS 7D, EOS 70D, EOS 60D, EOS 60Da, EOS 50D, EOS
40D, EOS 30D, EOS 20D, EOS 20Da, EOS REBEL T3i/600D, EOS REBEL
T2i/550D, EOS REBEL T1i/500D, EOS REBEL XSi/450D, EOS REBEL T5/
1200D, EOS REBEL T3/1100D, EOS REBEL XS/1000D, EOS DIGITAL
REBEL XTi/400D DIGITAL, EOS DIGITAL REBEL XT/350D DIGITAL, EOS
DIGITAL REBEL/300D DIGITAL
*2: The initial reset time varies depending on the camera used.

Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:

Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* Compatible with UHS-I cards
Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
* Excluding EF-M lenses
(35 mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the
lens focal length)
Canon EF mount

• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:

CMOS sensor
Approx. 24.2 megapixels
* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.
3:2
Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data

• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Recorded pixels:

Aspect ratio:
Create/select a folder:
File numbering:

Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)
RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
: 24 megapixels (6000 x 4000)
M (Medium) : Approx. 10.6 megapixels (3984 x 2656)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.9 megapixels (2976 x 1984)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: 24 megapixels (6000 x 4000)
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Possible
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset

• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
Basic+:
Extra Effect Shot:
White balance:

Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3
Ambience-based shots, Light/scene-based shots
Possible (in mode)
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom
White Balance correction and White balance bracketing
possible
* Flash color temperature information transmission
enabled

Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:

Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction, Distortion correction

• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage:

Magnification:
Eye point:
Built-in dioptric
adjustment:
Focusing screen:
Grid display:
Mirror:
Depth-of-field preview:

Eye-level pentamirror
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx.
19 mm)
* Vertical field of view in the 16:9 aspect ratio is approx. 93%.
Approx. 0.82x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 19 mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Fixed, Precision Matte
Possible
Quick-return type
Provided

• Autofocus
Type:

TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
AF points:
19 points (cross-type AF point: max. 19 points)
* With certain lenses, cross-type focusing at the
peripheral AF points is not possible.
* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point.
(Except with the EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro.)
Focusing brightness
EV -0.5 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-sensitive center AF point,
range:
One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)
Focus operation:
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF
Manual focusing (MF)
AF area selection mode: Single-point AF (Manual selection), Zone AF (Manual
selection of zone), 19-point automatic selection AF
Condition of AF point
AF point can be selected automatically in One-Shot AF
automatic selection:
mode, using information on colors equivalent to skin
tones.
AF-assist beam:
Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash

• Exposure Control
Metering mode:

63-zone TTL full-aperture metering using 7560-pixel
RGB plus IR metering sensor
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6.0% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 3.5% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
Metering brightness range: EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Exposure control:
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative
Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Special
scene modes (Kids, Food, Candlelight, Night Portrait,
Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control),
Program), Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE,
Manual exposure
Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
ISO speed
automatically
(Recommended
* Landscape: ISO 100 - ISO 1600, Handheld
exposure index):
Night Scene: ISO 100 - ISO 12800
Creative Zone modes: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
manually (whole-stop increments), ISO 100 - ISO 6400
set automatically, maximum ISO speed settable for ISO
Auto, or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600)
Exposure
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
compensation:
AEB:
±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
AE lock:
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: By AE lock button
Anti-flicker:
Possible

• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speed:

Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (Total shutter speed range.
Available range varies by shooting mode.), Bulb, X-sync
at 1/200 sec.

• Drive System
Drive modes:

Continuous shooting
speed:

Single shooting, Continuous shooting, Silent single
shooting, Silent continuous shooting,
Self-timer: 10-sec. delay/remote control, 2-sec. delay,
10-sec. delay with continuous shooting
Continuous shooting: Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

Max. burst (Approx.):

JPEG Large/Fine: 180 (940) shots
RAW: 7 (8) shots
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: 6 (6) shots
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2
aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style) using
an 8 GB card.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible
8 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.

• Flash
Built-in flash:

External flash:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Flash control:

Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide No.: Approx. 12/39.4 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view
Recycling time approx. 3 sec.
EX-series Speedlite
E-TTL II autoflash
±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
None
Built-in flash function settings, external Speedlite
function settings, external Speedlite Custom Function
settings
Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible

• Live View Shooting
Focus method:

Continuous AF:
Focusing brightness
range:
Touch shutter:
Metering mode:

Metering brightness
range:
Creative Filter:
Grid display:

Hybrid CMOS AF III System (Face+Tracking, FlexiZoneMulti, FlexiZone-Single), Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x
magnification possible)
Provided
EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Provided
Real-time metering with image sensor
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 10% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.7% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Two types

• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
Audio:
Recording size and
frame rate:
Compression method:
File size:

Focus method:
Movie Servo AF:
Focusing brightness
range:
Metering mode:

Metering brightness
range:
Exposure control:
Exposure
compensation:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):

Miniature effect movie:
Video snapshots:
Sound recording:

Grid display:
Still photo shooting:

MP4
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
AAC
Full HD (1920x1080) : 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
HD (1280x720)
: 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p
VGA (640x480)
: 29.97p/25.00p
Standard/Light
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)
(Standard)
: Approx. 216 MB/min.
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p) (Light) : Approx. 87 MB/min.
HD (59.94p/50.00p) (Standard) : Approx. 187 MB/min.
HD (29.97p/25.00p) (Light)
: Approx. 30 MB/min.
VGA (29.97p/25.00p) (Standard): Approx. 66 MB/min.
VGA (29.97p/25.00p) (Light)
: Approx. 23 MB/min.
Same as focusing with Live View shooting
Provided
EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focus method.
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Program AE for movies and manual exposure
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
With autoexposure shooting:
ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically
With manual exposure: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
automatically/manually, expandable to H (equivalent to
ISO 12800)
Possible
Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Built-in stereo microphones
External stereo microphone terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Two types
Possible

• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Interface languages:
Touch screen
technology:
Feature guide:

TFT color liquid-crystal monitor
Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0-in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Manual (7 levels)
25
Capacitive sensing
Displayable

• Playback
Image display format:

Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with simple information), Singleimage display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture
Style, Color space/noise reduction, Lens aberration
correction), Index display (4/9/36/100 images)
Zoom magnification:
Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Highlight alert:
Overexposed highlights blink
AF point display:
Provided
Image browsing method: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting
date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Image rotate:
Possible
Ratings:
Provided
Movie playback:
Enabled (LCD monitor, audio/video OUT, HDMI OUT)
Built-in speaker
Image protect:
Possible
Slide show:
All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by
rating
Five transition effects selectable
Background music:
Selectable for slide shows and movie playback

• Post-Processing of Images
Creative filters:
Resize:
Cropping:

Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
Possible
Possible

• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:

PictBridge-compatible printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible

• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
My Menu registration:
Copyright information:

13
Possible
Entry and inclusion enabled

• Interface
Audio/video OUT/Digital Analog video (compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio
terminal:
output
Hi-Speed USB equivalent: Computer communication,
Direct printing, GPS Receiver GP-E2, Connect Station
CS100 connection
HDMI mini OUT
Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
terminal:
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Compatible

• Power
Battery:
Number of possible
shots:

Movie shooting time:

Battery Pack LP-E17 (Quantity 1)
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E18
With viewfinder shooting: Approx. 440 shots at room
temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 400 shots at low
temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting: Approx. 180 shots at room
temperature (23°C/73°F), approx. 150 shots at low
temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17
Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C/73°F)
Approx. 1 hr. at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E17

• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 131.9 x 100.7 x 77.8 mm / 5.20 x 3.97 x 3.07 in.
Weight:
Approx. 555 g / 19.58 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
Approx. 510 g / 17.99 oz. (Body only)

• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:

0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less

• Battery Pack LP-E17
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated voltage:
7.2 V DC
Battery capacity:
1040 mAh
Working temperature
During charging: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
range:
During shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 33.0 x 14.0 x 49.4 mm / 1.30 x 0.55 x 1.94 in.
Weight:
Approx. 45 g / 1.59 oz. (excluding protective cover)

• Battery Charger LC-E17
Compatible battery:
Battery Pack LP-E17
Recharging time:
Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature (23°C/73°F))
Rated input:
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output:
8.4 V DC / 700 mA
Working temperature
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
range:
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm / 2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63 in.
(prongs retracted)
Weight:
Approx. 85 g / 3 oz.

• Battery Charger LC-E17E
Compatible battery:
Battery Pack LP-E17
Recharging time:
Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature (23°C/73°F))
Rated input:
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output:
8.4 V DC / 700 mA
Working temperature
5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F
range:
Working humidity:
85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm / 2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63 in.
(excluding power cord)
Weight:
Approx. 80 g / 2.82 oz. (excluding power cord)

• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
Focal length / Aperture: 18 mm-55 mm f/3.5-5.6
Lens construction:
13 elements in 11 groups
Minimum aperture:
f/22 - 36
* f/22-38 when 1/2-stop increments set for aperture.
Angle of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20´ - 27°50´
Vertical extent: 45°30´ - 15°40´
Horizontal extent: 64°30´ - 23°20´
Closest focusing
0.25 m / 0.82 ft.
distance:
Max. magnification:
0.36x (at 55 mm focal length)
Field of view:
Approx. 129 x 199 - 42 x 63 mm / 5.08 x 7.83 - 1.65 x
2.48 in. (at 0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)
Filter size:
58 mm
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 69.0 x 75.2 mm / 2.72 x 2.96 in.
Weight:
Approx. 205 g / 7.2 oz.
Hood:
EW-63C (sold separately)
Lens cap:
E-58 II
Case:
LP1016 (sold separately)

• EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
Focal length / Aperture: 18 mm-135 mm f/3.5-5.6
Lens construction:
16 elements in 12 groups
Minimum aperture:
f/22 - 36
* f/22-38 when 1/2-stop increments set for aperture.
Angle of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20´ - 11°30´
Vertical extent: 45°30´ - 6°20´
Horizontal extent: 64°30´ - 9°30´
Closest focusing
0.39 m / 1.28 ft.
distance:
Max. magnification:
0.28x (at 135 mm focal length)
Field of view:
Approx. 248 x 372 - 53 x 80 mm / 9.76 x 14.65 - 2.09 x
3.15 in. (at 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.)
Filter size:
67 mm
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.02 x 3.78 in.
Weight:
Approx. 480 g / 16.9 oz.
Hood:
EW-73B (sold separately)
Lens cap:
E-67 II
Case:
LP1116 (sold separately)

• EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM
Focal length / Aperture:
Lens construction:
Minimum aperture:
Angle of view:

Closest focusing
distance:
Max. magnification:
Field of view:

55 mm-250 mm f/4-5.6
15 elements in 12 groups
f/22 - 32
Diagonal extent: 27°50´ - 6°15´
Vertical extent: 15°40´ - 3°30´
Horizontal extent: 23°20´ - 5°20´
0.85 m / 2.79 ft.

0.29x (at 250 mm focal length)
Approx. 197 x 296 - 52 x 78 mm / 7.76 x 11.69 - 2.05 x
3.07 in. (at 0.85 m / 2.79 ft.)
Filter size:
58 mm
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 70.0 x 111.2 mm / 2.76 x 4.38 in.
Weight:
Approx. 375 g / 13.2 oz.
Hood:
ET-63 (sold separately)
Lens cap:
E-58 II
Case:
LP1019 (sold separately)
 All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
 Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on
CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
 Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
 If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.

Trademarks
 Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g.,
a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty
does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

Digital Camera Model DS126571 Systems
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used
with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC
Adapter Kit ACK-E18 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated
output: 8.0 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or
electrical shock.

USA and Canada only:
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is
recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on
how to recycle this battery.

For CA, USA only
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.

CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /
Downloading Images to Your Computer
This chapter explains how to view the Camera
Instruction Manual CD-ROM on your computer,
download images from the camera to your computer,
gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL
Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and explains how to install the
software on your computer. It also explains how to view
the Software Instruction Manuals.

Camera Instruction
Manual

EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
(Software/Software Instruction Manuals)

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM
The Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM contains
instruction manuals (PDF files) related to this product.

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM
To view the instruction manuals (PDF files), Adobe Reader 6.0 or higher
must be installed on your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded
free from the Internet. After installing Adobe Reader, follow the
procedure below.

the “CAMERA INSTRUCTION
1 Insert
MANUAL” CD-ROM into your computer.
the CD-ROM.
2 Double-click
 With Windows, double-click on the CD-ROM icon in
[(My) Computer]. With Macintosh, double-click on
the CD-ROM icon on the desktop.
 The icon displayed will differ depending on your
computer’s operating system.

the START file.
3 Double-click
 The icon displayed will differ depending on your
computer’s operating system.

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

4 Click your language.
the instruction manual you want to
5 Click
read.
 The manual will be displayed.

 You can save the PDF file to your computer.
 To learn how to use Adobe Reader, refer to Adobe Reader’s Help
section.

Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use the EOS software to download the images in the camera to
your computer. There are two ways to do this.

Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer

Install the software (p.405).

the provided interface cable
2 Use
to connect the camera to your
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 Connect the cable to the camera’s
digital terminal with the cable plug’s
icon facing the front of the
camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.

EOS Utility to download the
3 Use
images.
 Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual (p.406).

If [51: Wi-Fi/NFC] is set to [Enable], the camera cannot be connected to a
computer. Set [Wi-Fi/NFC] to [Disable], then reconnect the camera to a
computer with an interface cable.

Downloading Images to a Computer

Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can also use a card reader to download images to your computer.
Install the software (p.405).

the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.

Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
download the images.
 Refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual (p.406).

When downloading images from the camera to your computer with a card
reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to
your computer.

Software Overview
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
Various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras are contained
on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk.

EOS Utility
With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to
transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.
You can use this software to set various camera settings and shoot
remotely from the computer connected to the camera. Also, you can
copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*, to the
card.
* You can use the background music as the soundtrack for a video snapshot
album, movie, or slide show played back with your camera.

Digital Photo Professional
This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You
can view, edit, and print RAW images and JPEG images.
* Some functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer
and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.

Picture Style Editor
You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
processing images.

Installing the Software
 Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
 If a previous version is installed, follow the steps below to reinstall the
software. (The newer version will overwrite the previous version.)

Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your computer.
 For Macintosh, double-click to open the CD-ROM icon displayed
on the desktop, then double-click on [setup].

2 Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen
instructions to install.

 If the install screen for “Microsoft Silverlight” is displayed during
installation, install “Microsoft Silverlight”.

3 Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the
computer restarts.

 When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete.

Software Instruction Manual
Software Instruction Manuals are contained on the EOS
DIGITAL Solution Disk. You can copy and view the
software instruction manual (PDF files) as follows:

Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your
computer.

2 Close the install screen.

 When the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk install screen appears,
close the install screen.

3 Open the CD-ROM.
4 Open the [Manual] folder.
5 Copy the [English] folder to your computer.

 Instruction Manual PDFs with the names below are copied.
Windows

Digital Photo Professional

Picture Style Editor

6 Double-click the copied PDF file.

 Adobe Reader (most recent version recommended) must be
installed on your computer.
 Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet.

Index
Numerics
10- or 2-sec. self-timer ..................114
1280x720 ......................................233
1920x1080 ....................................233
19-point AF auto selection ............104
640x480 ........................................233

A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............66
AC Adapter Kit ..............................349
Access lamp....................................38
Accessories.......................................3
Adobe RGB...................................146
AE lock..........................................162
AEB
(Auto exposure bracketing)...160, 338
AF
AF area selection mode............104
AF method ........................206, 248
AF operation .............................100
AF point ....................................104
AF point selection .....................106
AF-assist beam.........................340
Beep (Beeper) ..........................256
Difficult subjects for AF .....110, 212
Manual focusing (MF).......111, 216
Out of focus ..........48, 49, 110, 212
Recomposing..............................69
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)..............102
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ........69, 102
Ambience-based shots ...................90
Angle of view...................................46
Anti-flicker shooting.......................144
Aperture-priority AE ......................152
Area AF frame.................................29
Art bold effect........................202, 314
Aspect ratio ...................................120
Attenuator .....................................251
Auto Lighting Optimizer.................136

Auto Playback .............................. 294
Auto power off ........................ 40, 257
Auto reset ..................................... 262
Auto rotate vertical images........... 265
Autofocus (AF) ............................. 100
Automatic selection of
AF point ................................ 104, 108
Av (Aperture-priority AE) .............. 152
A/V OUT (Audio/video output)...... 301

B
B/W (Monochrome) .............. 126, 129
Background blur ............................. 74
Background music........................ 297
Basic Zone modes.......................... 30
Battery ................................ 34, 36, 41
Battery check.................................. 41
Battery Grip ............................ 41, 360
Beep (Beeper) .............................. 256
Black-and-white image ... 90, 126, 129
Bracketing ............................ 135, 160
Brightness (exposure) .................. 159
Auto exposure bracketing
(AEB) ............................... 160, 338
Autoexposure lock (AE lock).... 162
Exposure compensation .......... 159
Measurement method
(metering mode)....................... 157
Built-in flash.................................. 166
BULB (bulb exposure) .................. 156

C
C (Creative Auto) ......................... 72
Cable ........ 3, 298, 301, 320, 360, 402
Camera
Camera shake.......................... 163
Clear camera settings .............. 267
Holding the camera.................... 49
Settings display........................ 266

Camera shake ..........................48, 49
Candlelight......................................83
Cards ..................................24, 37, 59
Card reminder ..........................256
Formatting ..................................59
Low-level formatting ...................60
SD speed class ............................5
Troubleshooting....................38, 60
Write-protect switch....................37
Center-weighted average
metering........................................158
Charger.....................................32, 34
Chromatic aberration correction ...141
Cleaning (image sensor).......271, 274
Clear camera settings...................267
Clipped highlights .........................310
Close-up .........................................78
Color saturation ............................128
Color space
(color reproduction range) ............146
Color temperature.........................132
Color tone .........................82, 83, 128
Continuous AF ..............................204
Continuous file numbering ............261
Continuous shooting .....................112
Contrast ........................................128
Copyright information....................263
Creative Auto ..................................72
Creative filters.......................200, 312
J (Creative Zone) icon....................8
Creative Zone modes .....................30
Cropping .......................................317
Cross-type focusing ......................109
Custom Functions.........................336
Custom white balance ..................133

D
Date/time........................................ 42
Daylight saving time ....................... 43
DC Coupler .................................. 349
Default settings tables.................. 268
Depth-of-field preview .................. 154
Detailed information ..................... 307
Digital terminal ..................... 320, 402
Dioptric adjustment ........................ 49
Direct printing ............................... 320
Distortion correction ..................... 141
Downloading images.................... 403
DPOF ........................................... 329
Dragging......................................... 57
Drive mode............... 28, 75, 112, 114
Dust Delete Data.......................... 272

E
Erasing images ............................ 304
Error codes................................... 382
Evaluative metering...................... 157
Exposure compensation............... 159
Exposure level increments ........... 338
External flash ............................... 171
Extra Effect Shot ............................ 73
Eyecup ......................................... 351
Eye-Fi card................................... 352
Eyepiece cover....................... 33, 351

F
FE lock ......................................... 169
Feature guide ................................. 64
FEB (Flash exposure bracketing) ...176
File extension ............................... 262
File name ..................................... 261
File size ........................ 117, 235, 307
Filter effect ........................... 129, 312

Final image simulation ..........197, 229
Fine (image-recording quality) ........28
Firmware version ..........................366
First-curtain synchronization .........177
Fish-eye effect ......................202, 314
Flash
Built-in flash ..............................166
Custom Functions.....................178
Effective range..........................166
External flash............................171
FE lock......................................169
Flash control .............................173
Flash exposure bracketing (FEB)... 176
Flash exposure compensation... 168
Flash off..........................71, 75, 89
Flash sync speed......................172
Manual flash .....................177, 190
Red-eye reduction ....................167
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain)........................177
Wireless....................................177
Flash mode ...........................176, 177
Flash sync contacts ........................26
Flicker detection........................29, 63
Focus indicator................................66
Focus lock.......................................69
Focus mode switch .........45, 111, 216
Focusing 9 AF
Focusing point (AF point)..............104
Folder creation/selection...............259
Food................................................82
Formatting (card initialization).........59
Frame rate ....................................233
Full High-Definition
(Full HD)........................221, 288, 298
Fully automatic shooting (Scene
Intelligent Auto) ...............................66
Functions settable by shooting
mode .............................................354

G
Grainy B/W ........................... 202, 313
Grid................................. 62, 204, 250

H
Handheld Night Scene ................... 85
HD ........................................ 288, 298
HDMI .................................... 288, 298
HDMI CEC.................................... 299
HDR Backlight Control ................... 86
High ISO speed noise reduction... 137
High-Definition (HD) movies ...288, 298
Highlight alert ............................... 310
Highlight tone priority.................... 339
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)........ 310
Hot shoe ................................. 26, 171
Household power ......................... 349

I
ICC profile .................................... 146
Image dust prevention.................. 271
Image review time ........................ 257
Image-recording quality................ 116
Images
AF point display ....................... 309
Auto playback .......................... 294
Auto rotate ............................... 265
Erasing..................................... 304
File numbering ......................... 261
Highlight alert ........................... 310
Histogram................................. 310
Index display ............................ 278
Jump display
(image browsing) ..................... 279
Magnified view ......................... 280
Manual rotate ........................... 283
Playback ............................ 97, 277
Protecting................................. 302
Rating....................................... 284
Review time ............................. 257

Shooting information ................306
Slide show ................................294
Transfer ....................................352
Viewing on a TV set .........288, 298
Index display.................................278
INFO. button ...................................97
ISO speed.....................................122
Automatic setting (Auto) ...........124
ISO expansion..........................338
Maximum ISO speed
for ISO Auto..............................123

J
JPEG ............................................117
Jump display.................................279

K
Kids.................................................81

L
Landscape ..............................77, 126
Language selection.........................44
Large
(image-recording quality) ........28, 315
LCD monitor..............................24, 39
Brightness adjustment..............258
Image playback ..................97, 277
Menu display ......................53, 362
Screen color .............................270
Shooting function
settings .................................28, 61
Lens ....................................25, 31, 45
Chromatic aberration
correction..................................141
Distortion correction .................141
Image Stabilizer..........................48
Lock release ...............................46
Peripheral illumination
correction..................................140
Lighting/scene-based shots ............94

Live View shooting ................. 70, 191
Aspect ratio.............................. 120
Continuous AF ......................... 204
Face+Tracking ......................... 206
FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 208
FlexiZone - Single.................... 210
Grid display.............................. 204
Information display................... 194
Manual focusing (MF) .............. 216
Metering timer.......................... 205
Possible shots.......................... 193
Quick Control ........................... 198
Long exposure noise reduction .... 138
Long exposures............................ 156

M
M (Manual exposure) ................... 155
Macro photography ........................ 78
Magnification ........................ 216, 280
Main Dial ........................................ 26
Manual exposure.................. 155, 225
Manual focus (MF) ............... 111, 216
Manual reset ................................ 262
Manual selection of AF point........ 106
Maximum burst..................... 117, 118
Medium
(image-recording quality) ....... 28, 315
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu .............................................. 53
My Menu .................................. 346
Setting procedure ...................... 54
Settings.................................... 362
3 icon ........................................ 8
Metering mode ............................. 157
Metering timer ...................... 205, 250
MF (manual focusing) .......... 111, 216
Microphone .................................. 222
Miniature effect..................... 203, 314
Miniature effect movies ................ 236

Mirror lockup .........................163, 342
Mode Dial........................................30
Monochrome ...................90, 126, 129
Movies...........................................221
AE lock .....................................162
AF method ........................232, 248
Attenuator .................................251
Autoexposure ...........................222
Editing.......................................292
Editing out first and last scenes...292
Enjoying movies .......................288
File size ....................................235
Frame rate ................................233
Grid...........................................250
Information display ...................227
Manual exposure shooting .......225
Manual focus ............................222
Metering timer...........................250
Miniature effect movie ..............236
Movie recording size.................233
Movie Servo AF ........................248
Playback ...................................290
Quick Control............................232
Recording size..........................233
Recording Time ........................235
Sound recording .......................251
Still photo shooting ...................230
Video snapshot album ..............238
Video snapshots .......................238
Viewing on a TV set..........288, 298
Wind filter..................................251
Multi Shot Noise Reduction...........137
My Menu .......................................346

N
Night Portrait ...................................84
Night scenes .............................84, 85
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ........................137
Long exposures ........................138
Nomenclature..................................26

Non-Canon flash units.................. 172
Normal (image-recording quality) ... 28
NTSC.................................... 233, 366

O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) .......... 101

P
P (Program AE) ............................ 148
PAL....................................... 233, 366
Partial metering ............................ 157
Peripheral illumination correction....140
Photobook set-up ......................... 333
PictBridge ..................................... 319
Picture Style ................. 125, 127, 130
Pixel count.................................... 116
Playback................................. 97, 277
Portrait.................................... 76, 126
Possible shots ................ 41, 117, 193
Power
Auto power off.......................... 257
Battery check ............................. 41
Battery information................... 348
Household power ..................... 349
Possible shots............ 41, 117, 193
Recharge ............................. 34, 41
Recharge performance ............ 348
Pressing completely ....................... 50
Pressing halfway ............................ 50
Printing ......................................... 319
Cropping .................................. 327
Page layout .............................. 323
Paper settings .......................... 322
Photobook set-up..................... 333
Print order (DPOF)................... 329
Printing effects ......................... 324
Tilt correction............................ 327
Program AE.................................. 148
Program shift ................................ 149
Protecting images......................... 302

Q
Q (Quick
Control) .............51, 88, 198, 232, 286
Quick Control ....51, 88, 198, 232, 286

R
Rating mark ..................................284
Ratings..........................................284
RAW ...............................28, 117, 119
RAW+JPEG ....................28, 117, 119
Recharge ..........................34, 41, 348
Red-eye reduction ........................167
Release shutter without card ........256
Remote control shooting...............350
Remote switch ..............................351
Resizing ........................................315
Revert to default settings ..............267
Rotation (image) ...........265, 283, 327

S
Safety precautions ..........................20
Scene icons ..........................196, 224
Scene Intelligent Auto.....................66
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization....177
Self-timer ......................................114
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Sensor cleaning ....................271, 274
Sepia (monochrome) ..............90, 129
Sharpness.....................................128
Shooting function settings.........28, 61
Shooting information display.........306
Shooting mode................................30
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ..........152
M (Manual exposure) ...............155
P (Program AE) ........................148
Tv (Shutter-priority AE).............150
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......66

7 (Flash Off)............................ 71
C (Creative Auto) .................... 72
2 (Portrait)................................ 76
3 (Landscape)......................... 77
4 (Close-up)............................. 78
5 (Sports) ................................ 79
8 (Special scene) ................. 80
C(Kids) .................................. 81
P (Food)................................. 82
x (Candlelight) ...................... 83
6 (Night Portrait) ................... 84
F (Handheld Night Scene) .... 85
G (HDR Backlight Control) .... 86
Shutter button................................. 50
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) ........................... 177
Shutter-priority AE........................ 150
Silent shooting
Continuous shooting ................ 112
Single shooting ........................ 112
Single
shooting.......... 75, 112, 355, 357, 359
Single-image display ...................... 97
Single-point AF............................. 104
Slide show.................................... 294
Small
(image-recording quality) ....... 28, 315
Soft focus ............................. 202, 313
Software ....................................... 404
Speaker ........................................ 290
Special scene mode ....................... 80
Specifications ............................... 384
Sports ............................................. 79
Spot metering ............................... 157
sRGB............................................ 146
Stop down aperture ...................... 154
Strap............................................... 33
System map ................................. 360

T
Tapping ...........................................56
Temperature warning ............218, 253
Time zone .......................................42
Tone priority ..................................339
Toning effect (monochrome) .........129
Touch beeping.................................57
Touch screen.....................27, 56, 281
Touch Shutter................................214
Toy camera effect..................203, 314
Tripod socket ..................................27
Troubleshooting ............................369
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .................150

Z
Zone AF........................................ 104

U
USB (digital) terminal ............320, 402

V
Video snapshot album ..................238
Video snapshots ...........................238
Video system ................233, 298, 366
Viewfinder .......................................29
Dioptric adjustment.....................49
Flicker detection .........................63
Grid display.................................62
Viewing on a TV set ..............288, 298
Volume (movie playback)..............291

W
Water painting effect .............202, 314
WB (white balance).......................132
White balance ...............................132
Bracketing.................................135
Correction .................................134
Custom .....................................132
Personal ...................................133
Wi-Fi..............................................364
Wind filter ......................................251
Wireless flash shooting .................179

The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of March 2015. For
information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon Web site.

© CANON INC. 2015

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V1.2 (40-bit) User Access : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Create Date : 2015:01:14 17:23:24Z Creator Tool : FrameMaker 6.0 Modify Date : 2015:03:04 11:42:30+09:00 Metadata Date : 2015:03:04 11:42:30+09:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.12 (Windows) Format : application/pdf Title : Creator : Document ID : uuid:02992655-d60b-4dfd-ba88-fd912918a4ab Instance ID : uuid:872fa3b8-e57b-411b-802b-2e425a29c192 Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 414
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu

Upload a User Manual

Versions of this User Manual:

Wiki Guide

HTML

Mobile

Download & Help

Views

User Manual

Discussion / Help

Navigation

© 2025 UserManual.wiki

Contact Us

DMCA